PR24262, plugin search dir doesn't respect --libdir
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item
764 How GNU properties are merged.
765
766 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
769
770 @smallexample
771 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
775 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778 @smallexample
779 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
780 @end smallexample
781
782 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
783 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
785 @end itemize
786
787 @cindex link map discarded
788 @kindex --print-map-discarded
789 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790 @item --print-map-discarded
791 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793 in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
795 @kindex -n
796 @cindex read-only text
797 @cindex NMAGIC
798 @kindex --nmagic
799 @item -n
800 @itemx --nmagic
801 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
804
805 @kindex -N
806 @kindex --omagic
807 @cindex read/write from cmd line
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item -N
810 @itemx --omagic
811 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
812 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
814 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816 specification published by Microsoft.
817
818 @kindex --no-omagic
819 @cindex OMAGIC
820 @item --no-omagic
821 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
825
826 @kindex -o @var{output}
827 @kindex --output=@var{output}
828 @cindex naming the output file
829 @item -o @var{output}
830 @itemx --output=@var{output}
831 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
832 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835 @kindex -O @var{level}
836 @cindex generating optimized output
837 @item -O @var{level}
838 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
839 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
840 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
845
846 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
847 @item -plugin @var{name}
848 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852 wish.
853
854 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
858 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
859 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
860 just copy in the newest one.
861
862 @kindex --push-state
863 @cindex push state governing input file handling
864 @item --push-state
865 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879 something as follows:
880
881 @smallexample
882 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883 @end smallexample
884
885 @kindex --pop-state
886 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
887 @item --pop-state
888 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889 flags governing input file handling.
890
891 @kindex -q
892 @kindex --emit-relocs
893 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
894 @item -q
895 @itemx --emit-relocs
896 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
897 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899 in larger executables.
900
901 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
903 @kindex --force-dynamic
904 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905 @item --force-dynamic
906 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907 to VxWorks targets.
908
909 @cindex partial link
910 @cindex relocatable output
911 @kindex -r
912 @kindex --relocatable
913 @item -r
914 @itemx --relocatable
915 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
916 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
917 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919 @code{OMAGIC}.
920 @c ; see @option{-N}.
921 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
925 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929 with input files in other formats at all.
930
931 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933 @kindex -R @var{file}
934 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935 @cindex symbol-only input
936 @item -R @var{filename}
937 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941 programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
943 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
944 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
945 the @option{-rpath} option.
946
947 @kindex -s
948 @kindex --strip-all
949 @cindex strip all symbols
950 @item -s
951 @itemx --strip-all
952 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954 @kindex -S
955 @kindex --strip-debug
956 @cindex strip debugger symbols
957 @item -S
958 @itemx --strip-debug
959 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
961 @kindex --strip-discarded
962 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
963 @item --strip-discarded
964 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
965 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966 Enabled by default.
967
968 @kindex -t
969 @kindex --trace
970 @cindex input files, displaying
971 @item -t
972 @itemx --trace
973 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977 a linker bug report.
978
979 @kindex -T @var{script}
980 @kindex --script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
985 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
986 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
987 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990 options accumulate.
991
992 @kindex -dT @var{script}
993 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994 @cindex script files
995 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006 @samp{gcc}).
1007
1008 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex undefined symbol
1011 @item -u @var{symbol}
1012 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
1019 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022 instead.
1023
1024 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbols, require defined
1026 @cindex defined symbol
1027 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
1035 @kindex -Ur
1036 @cindex constructors
1037 @item -Ur
1038 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1040 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1041 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045 @samp{-r} for the others.
1046
1047 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048 @cindex orphan sections
1049 @cindex sections, orphan
1050 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056 @table @code
1057 @item place
1058 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1060 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1061
1062 @item discard
1063 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066 @item warn
1067 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068 issue a warning.
1069
1070 @item error
1071 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072 @end table
1073
1074 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
1076 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084 in a linker script.
1085
1086 @kindex -v
1087 @kindex -V
1088 @kindex --version
1089 @cindex version
1090 @item -v
1091 @itemx --version
1092 @itemx -V
1093 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1094 lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096 @kindex -x
1097 @kindex --discard-all
1098 @cindex deleting local symbols
1099 @item -x
1100 @itemx --discard-all
1101 Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103 @kindex -X
1104 @kindex --discard-locals
1105 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1106 @item -X
1107 @itemx --discard-locals
1108 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1111
1112 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114 @cindex symbol tracing
1115 @item -y @var{symbol}
1116 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119 to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1125 @item -Y @var{path}
1126 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127 for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130 @item -z @var{keyword}
1131 The recognized keywords are:
1132 @table @samp
1133
1134 @item bndplt
1135 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
1149 @item cet-report=none
1150 @itemx cet-report=warning
1151 @itemx cet-report=error
1152 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item combreloc
1165 @itemx nocombreloc
1166 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1168
1169 @item common
1170 @itemx nocommon
1171 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177 using pages of this size.
1178
1179 @item defs
1180 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1183
1184 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192 these options.
1193
1194 @item execstack
1195 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
1197 @item global
1198 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
1202 @item globalaudit
1203 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1207 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1208 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1209
1210 @item ibtplt
1211 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
1214 @item ibt
1215 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item initfirst
1220 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225 objects.
1226
1227 @item interpose
1228 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230 libraries not so marked.
1231
1232 @item lazy
1233 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236 Lazy binding is the default.
1237
1238 @item loadfltr
1239 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1240
1241 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1243
1244 @item muldefs
1245 Allow multiple definitions.
1246
1247 @item nocopyreloc
1248 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1250
1251 @item nodefaultlib
1252 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253 should ignore any default library search paths.
1254
1255 @item nodelete
1256 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1257
1258 @item nodlopen
1259 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1260
1261 @item nodump
1262 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1263
1264 @item noexecstack
1265 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
1267 @item noextern-protected-data
1268 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273 i386 and x86-64.
1274
1275 @item noreloc-overflow
1276 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1279
1280 @item now
1281 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1283 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285 called.
1286
1287 @item origin
1288 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1289
1290 @item relro
1291 @itemx norelro
1292 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1296 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1297
1298 @item separate-code
1299 @itemx noseparate-code
1300 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
1305 @item shstk
1306 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1309
1310 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1311 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1312 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
1315 @item text
1316 @itemx notext
1317 @itemx textoff
1318 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1321
1322 @item undefs
1323 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
1327 @end table
1328
1329 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -(
1332 @cindex groups of archives
1333 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1334 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1344 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1345 resolved.
1346
1347 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349 more archives.
1350
1351 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1356 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1357 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361 restore the old behaviour.
1362
1363 @kindex --as-needed
1364 @kindex --no-as-needed
1365 @item --as-needed
1366 @itemx --no-as-needed
1367 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1368 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1369 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1371 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1372 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1374 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1376 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1380
1381 @kindex --add-needed
1382 @kindex --no-add-needed
1383 @item --add-needed
1384 @itemx --no-add-needed
1385 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1389
1390 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1392 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bdynamic
1395 @kindex -dy
1396 @kindex -call_shared
1397 @item -Bdynamic
1398 @itemx -dy
1399 @itemx -call_shared
1400 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1405 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1406
1407 @kindex -Bgroup
1408 @item -Bgroup
1409 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1412 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bstatic
1416 @kindex -dn
1417 @kindex -non_shared
1418 @kindex -static
1419 @item -Bstatic
1420 @itemx -dn
1421 @itemx -non_shared
1422 @itemx -static
1423 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1427 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1428 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1432 libraries.
1433
1434 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1435 @item -Bsymbolic
1436 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1439 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1440 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1441 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1442 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1443 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1444
1445 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1446 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1447 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1448 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1449 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1450 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1451 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1452 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1453 libraries and position independent executables.
1454
1455 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1457 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1458 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1459 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1460 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1461 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1462 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1463 which support shared libraries.
1464
1465 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1466 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1467
1468 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1469 @item --dynamic-list-data
1470 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1471
1472 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1474 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1475 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1476
1477 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1479 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1480
1481 @kindex --check-sections
1482 @kindex --no-check-sections
1483 @item --check-sections
1484 @itemx --no-check-sections
1485 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1486 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1487 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1488 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1489 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1490 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1491 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1492 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1493 option.
1494
1495 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1496 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1497 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1498 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1499 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1500 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1501 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1502 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1503 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1504 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1505 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1506 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1507
1508 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1509 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1510 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1511 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1512 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1513 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1514 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1515 symbols.
1516
1517 @cindex cross reference table
1518 @kindex --cref
1519 @item --cref
1520 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1521 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1522 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1523
1524 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1525 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1526 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1527 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1528 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1529 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1530 symbol are listed.
1531
1532 @cindex common allocation
1533 @kindex --no-define-common
1534 @item --no-define-common
1535 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1536 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1537 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1538
1539 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1540 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1541 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1542 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1543 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1544 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1545 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1546 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1547 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1548 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1549
1550 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1551 @cindex section groups
1552 @cindex COMDAT
1553 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1554 @item --force-group-allocation
1555 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1556 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1557 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1558 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1559 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1560 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1561
1562 @cindex symbols, from command line
1563 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1564 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1565 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1566 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1567 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1568 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1569 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1570 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1571 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1572 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1573 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1574 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1575
1576 @cindex demangling, from command line
1577 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1578 @kindex --no-demangle
1579 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1580 @itemx --no-demangle
1581 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1582 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1583 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1584 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1585 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1586 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1587 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1588 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1589 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1590
1591 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1592 @kindex -I@var{file}
1593 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1594 @item -I@var{file}
1595 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1596 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1597 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1598 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1599 doing.
1600
1601 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1602 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1603 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1604 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1605 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1606 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1607
1608 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1609 @item --embedded-relocs
1610 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1611 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1612 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1613 targets.
1614
1615 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1617 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1618 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1619
1620 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1621 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1622 @item --fatal-warnings
1623 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1624 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1625 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1626
1627 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1628 @item --force-exe-suffix
1629 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1630
1631 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1632 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1633 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1634 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1635 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1636 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1637
1638 @kindex --gc-sections
1639 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1640 @cindex garbage collection
1641 @item --gc-sections
1642 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1643 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1644 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1645 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1646 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1647 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1648 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1649
1650 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1651 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1652 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1653 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1654 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1655 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1656 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1657 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1658 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1659 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1660
1661 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1662 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1663 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1664 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1665 command in the linker script.
1666
1667 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1668 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1669 @cindex garbage collection
1670 @item --print-gc-sections
1671 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1672 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1673 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1674 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1675 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1676 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1677 line.
1678
1679 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1680 @cindex garbage collection
1681 @item --gc-keep-exported
1682 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1683 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1684 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1685 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1686 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1687 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1688 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1689 ELF format targets.
1690
1691 @kindex --print-output-format
1692 @cindex output format
1693 @item --print-output-format
1694 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1695 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1696 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1697
1698 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1699 @cindex memory usage
1700 @item --print-memory-usage
1701 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1702 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1703 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1704 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1705 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1706
1707 @smallexample
1708 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1709 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1710 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1711 @end smallexample
1712
1713 @cindex help
1714 @cindex usage
1715 @kindex --help
1716 @item --help
1717 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1718
1719 @kindex --target-help
1720 @item --target-help
1721 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1722
1723 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1725 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1726 @option{-M} option, above.
1727
1728 @cindex memory usage
1729 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1730 @item --no-keep-memory
1731 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1732 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1733 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1734 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1735 while linking a large executable.
1736
1737 @kindex --no-undefined
1738 @kindex -z defs
1739 @kindex -z undefs
1740 @item --no-undefined
1741 @itemx -z defs
1742 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1743 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1744 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1745 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1746 libraries being linked in.
1747
1748 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1749
1750 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1751 @kindex -z muldefs
1752 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1753 @itemx -z muldefs
1754 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1755 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1756 first definition will be used.
1757
1758 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1759 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1760 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1761 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1762 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1763 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1764 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1765 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1766 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1767
1768 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1769 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1770 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1771 a shared library.
1772
1773 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1774 libraries specified at link time are that:
1775
1776 @itemize @bullet
1777 @item
1778 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1779 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1780 resolvable at load time.
1781 @item
1782 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1783 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1784
1785 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1786 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1787 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1788 appropriate memset function.
1789 @end itemize
1790
1791 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1792 @item --no-undefined-version
1793 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1794 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1795 will be issued instead.
1796
1797 @kindex --default-symver
1798 @item --default-symver
1799 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1800 exported symbols.
1801
1802 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1803 @item --default-imported-symver
1804 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1805 imported symbols.
1806
1807 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1808 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1809 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1810 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1811 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1812 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1813 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1814 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1815 inappropriate.
1816
1817 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1819 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1820 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1821
1822 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1823 @item --no-whole-archive
1824 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1825 archive files.
1826
1827 @cindex output file after errors
1828 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1829 @item --noinhibit-exec
1830 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1831 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1832 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1833 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1834
1835 @kindex -nostdlib
1836 @item -nostdlib
1837 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1838 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1839 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1840
1841 @ifclear SingleFormat
1842 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1844 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1845 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1846 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1847 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1848 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1849 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1850 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1851 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1852 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1853 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1854 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1855 @end ifclear
1856
1857 @kindex --out-implib
1858 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1859 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1860 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1861 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1862 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1863 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1864 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1865 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1866
1867 @kindex -pie
1868 @kindex --pic-executable
1869 @item -pie
1870 @itemx --pic-executable
1871 @cindex position independent executables
1872 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1873 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1874 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1875 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1876 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1877 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1878
1879 @kindex -qmagic
1880 @item -qmagic
1881 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1882
1883 @kindex -Qy
1884 @item -Qy
1885 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1886
1887 @kindex --relax
1888 @cindex synthesizing linker
1889 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1890 @cindex --no-relax
1891 @item --relax
1892 @itemx --no-relax
1893 An option with machine dependent effects.
1894 @ifset GENERIC
1895 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset H8300
1898 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1899 @end ifset
1900 @ifset XTENSA
1901 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifset M68HC11
1904 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1905 @end ifset
1906 @ifset NIOSII
1907 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1908 @end ifset
1909 @ifset POWERPC
1910 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1911 @end ifset
1912
1913 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1914 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1915 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1916 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1917 instructions, and combining constant values.
1918
1919 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1920 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1921 @ifset GENERIC
1922 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1923 family of processors.
1924 @end ifset
1925
1926 @ifset GENERIC
1927 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1928 but ignored.
1929 @end ifset
1930
1931 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1932 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1933
1934 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1935 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1936 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1937 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1939 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1940 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1941 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1942 @ifset GENERIC
1943 (such as VxWorks)
1944 @end ifset
1945 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1946 run-time memory.
1947
1948 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1949 or symbols needed for relocations.
1950
1951 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1952 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1953
1954 @ifset GENERIC
1955 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1956 @cindex runtime library search path
1957 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1958 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1959 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1960 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1961 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1962
1963 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1964 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1965 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1966 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1967 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1968
1969 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1970 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1971 is defined.
1972
1973 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1974 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1975 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1976 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1977 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1978 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1979 file systems.
1980
1981 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1982 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1983 the @option{-rpath} option.
1984 @end ifset
1985
1986 @ifset GENERIC
1987 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1988 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1989 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1990 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1991 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1992 of the input files.
1993
1994 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1995 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1996 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1997 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1998 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1999 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2000 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2001 appearing multiple times.
2002
2003 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2004 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2005 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2006 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2007 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2008
2009 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2010 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2011 supported.
2012
2013 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2014 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2015 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2016 runtime linker would do.
2017
2018 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2019 libraries:
2020 @enumerate
2021 @item
2022 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2023 @item
2024 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2025 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2026 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2027 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2028 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2029 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2030 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2031 @item
2032 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2033 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2034 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2037 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2038 @item
2039 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2040 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2041 @item
2042 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2043 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2044 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2045 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2046 @item
2047 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2048 @item
2049 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2050 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2051 @end enumerate
2052
2053 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2054 warning and continue with the link.
2055 @end ifset
2056
2057 @kindex -shared
2058 @kindex -Bshareable
2059 @item -shared
2060 @itemx -Bshareable
2061 @cindex shared libraries
2062 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2063 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2064 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2065 undefined symbols in the link.
2066
2067 @kindex --sort-common
2068 @item --sort-common
2069 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2070 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2071 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2072 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2073 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2074 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2075 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2076 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2077
2078 @kindex --sort-section=name
2079 @item --sort-section=name
2080 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2081 patterns in the linker script.
2082
2083 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2084 @item --sort-section=alignment
2085 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2086 patterns in the linker script.
2087
2088 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2089 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2090 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2091 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2092 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-file
2095 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2096 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2097 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2098 size of 1 if not given.
2099
2100 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2101 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2102 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2103 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2104 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2105 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2106 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2107 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2108 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2109 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2110 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2111 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2112
2113 @kindex --stats
2114 @item --stats
2115 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2116 as execution time and memory usage.
2117
2118 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2119 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2120 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2121 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2122 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2123
2124 @kindex --task-link
2125 @item --task-link
2126 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2127 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2128
2129 @kindex --traditional-format
2130 @cindex traditional format
2131 @item --traditional-format
2132 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2133 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2134 use the traditional format instead.
2135
2136 @cindex dbx
2137 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2138 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2139 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2140 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2141 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2142 combine duplicate entries.
2143
2144 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2145 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2146 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2147 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2148 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2149 line.
2150 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2151 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2152 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2153 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2154 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2155
2156 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2157 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2158 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2159 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2160 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2161 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2162 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2163 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2164 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2165
2166 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2170 byte of the text segment.
2171
2172 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2173 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2175 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2176 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2177 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2178
2179 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2180 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2181 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2182 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2183 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2184
2185 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2186 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2187 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2188 values for @samp{method}:
2189
2190 @table @samp
2191 @item ignore-all
2192 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2193
2194 @item report-all
2195 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2196
2197 @item ignore-in-object-files
2198 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2199 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2200
2201 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2202 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2203 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2204 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2205 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2206 command line.
2207 @end table
2208
2209 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2210 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2211
2212 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2213 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2214 can change this to a warning.
2215
2216 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2217 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2218 @item --dll-verbose
2219 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2220 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2221 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2222 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2223 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2224
2225 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2226 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2227 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2228 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2229 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2230 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2231 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2232 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2233 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2234 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2235 @xref{WIN32}.
2236
2237 @kindex --warn-common
2238 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2239 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2240 @item --warn-common
2241 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2242 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2243 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2244 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2245 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2246 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2247
2248 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2249
2250 @table @samp
2251 @item int i = 1;
2252 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2253 file.
2254
2255 @item extern int i;
2256 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2257 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2258 variable somewhere.
2259
2260 @item int i;
2261 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2262 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2263 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2264 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2265 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2266 a definition of the same variable.
2267 @end table
2268
2269 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2270 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2271 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2272 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2273 a common symbol.
2274
2275 @enumerate
2276 @item
2277 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2278 definition for the symbol.
2279 @smallexample
2280 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2281 overridden by definition
2282 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2283 @end smallexample
2284
2285 @item
2286 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2287 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2288 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2289 @smallexample
2290 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2291 overriding common
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2293 @end smallexample
2294
2295 @item
2296 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2297 @smallexample
2298 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2299 of `@var{symbol}'
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2301 @end smallexample
2302
2303 @item
2304 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2305 @smallexample
2306 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2307 overridden by larger common
2308 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2309 @end smallexample
2310
2311 @item
2312 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2313 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2314 encountered in a different order.
2315 @smallexample
2316 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2317 overriding smaller common
2318 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2319 @end smallexample
2320 @end enumerate
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-constructors
2323 @item --warn-constructors
2324 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2325 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2326 detect the use of global constructors.
2327
2328 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2329 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2330 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2331 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2332 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2333 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2334 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2335 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2336 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2337 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2338 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2339 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2340 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2341
2342 @kindex --warn-once
2343 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2344 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2345 @item --warn-once
2346 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2347 which refers to it.
2348
2349 @kindex --warn-section-align
2350 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2351 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2352 @item --warn-section-align
2353 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2354 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2355 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2356 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2357 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2358
2359 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2360 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2361 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2362
2363 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2364 @item --warn-alternate-em
2365 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2366
2367 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2369 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2370 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2371 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2372
2373 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2374 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2375 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2376 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2377
2378 @kindex --whole-archive
2379 @cindex including an entire archive
2380 @item --whole-archive
2381 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2382 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2383 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2384 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2385 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2386 library. This option may be used more than once.
2387
2388 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2389 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2390 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2391 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2392 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2393
2394 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2395 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2396 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2397 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2398 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2399 @var{symbol}.
2400
2401 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2402 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2403 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2404 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2405
2406 Here is a trivial example:
2407
2408 @smallexample
2409 void *
2410 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2411 @{
2412 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2413 return __real_malloc (c);
2414 @}
2415 @end smallexample
2416
2417 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2418 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2419 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2420 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2421
2422 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2423 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2424 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2425 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2426 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2427
2428 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2429 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2430 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2431 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2432
2433 @smallexample
2434 int
2435 f (void)
2436 @{
2437 return 123;
2438 @}
2439
2440 int
2441 g (void)
2442 @{
2443 return f();
2444 @}
2445 @end smallexample
2446
2447 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2448 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2449 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2450 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2451 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2452 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2453 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2454
2455 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2456 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2457 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2458 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2459 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2460
2461 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2462 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2463 @item --enable-new-dtags
2464 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2465 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2466 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2467 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2468 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2469 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2470 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2471 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2472
2473 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2474 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2475 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2476 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2477 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2478 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2479 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2480
2481 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2482 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2483 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2484 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2485 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2486 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2487 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2488 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2489
2490 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2491 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2492 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2493 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2494 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2495 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2496 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2497 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2498 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2499 compressed using zlib.
2500
2501 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2502 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2503 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2504 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2505 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2506 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2507
2508 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2509 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2510
2511 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2512 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2513 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2514 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2515
2516 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2517 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2518 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2519 @option{--help} option.
2520
2521 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2522 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2523 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2524 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2525 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2526 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2527
2528 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2529 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2530 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2531 has been used.
2532
2533 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2534 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2535
2536 @kindex --build-id
2537 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2538 @item --build-id
2539 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2540 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2541 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2542 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2543 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2544 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2545 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2546 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2547 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2548 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2549 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2550
2551 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2552 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2553 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2554 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2555 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2556 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2557
2558 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2559 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2560 @end table
2561
2562 @c man end
2563
2564 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2565
2566 @c man begin OPTIONS
2567
2568 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2569 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2570 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2571 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2572 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2573 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2574 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2575 object file).
2576
2577 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2578 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2579 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2580 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2581
2582 @table @gcctabopt
2583
2584 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2585 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2586 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2587 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2588 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2589
2590 @kindex --base-file
2591 @item --base-file @var{file}
2592 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2593 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2594 @file{dlltool}.
2595 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2596
2597 @kindex --dll
2598 @item --dll
2599 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2600 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2601 file.
2602 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2603
2604 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2605 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2606 @item --enable-long-section-names
2607 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2608 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2609 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2610 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2611 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2612 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2613 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2614 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2615 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2616 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2617 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2618 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2619 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2620 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2621 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2622 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2623 image and not stripping symbols.
2624 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2625
2626 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2627 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2628 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2629 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2630 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2631 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2632 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2633 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2634 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2635 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2636 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2637 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2638 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2639 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2640 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2641 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2642 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2643 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2644
2645 @kindex --leading-underscore
2646 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2647 @item --leading-underscore
2648 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2649 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2650 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2651 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2652
2653 @cindex DLLs, creating
2654 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2655 @item --export-all-symbols
2656 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2657 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2658 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2659 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2660 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2661 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2662 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2663 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2664 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2665 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2666 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2667 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2668 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2669 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2670 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2671 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2672 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2673 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2674 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2675 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2676 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2677 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2681 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2682 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2683 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2684 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2685
2686 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2687 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2688 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2689 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2690
2691 @kindex --file-alignment
2692 @item --file-alignment
2693 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2694 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2695 512.
2696 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2697
2698 @cindex heap size
2699 @kindex --heap
2700 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2701 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2702 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2703 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2704 committed.
2705 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2706
2707 @cindex image base
2708 @kindex --image-base
2709 @item --image-base @var{value}
2710 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2711 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2712 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2713 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2714 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2715 for dlls.
2716 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2717
2718 @kindex --kill-at
2719 @item --kill-at
2720 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2721 symbols before they are exported.
2722 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2723
2724 @kindex --large-address-aware
2725 @item --large-address-aware
2726 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2727 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2728 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2729 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2730 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2731 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2734 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2735 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2736 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2737 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2738 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2739 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2740
2741 @kindex --major-image-version
2742 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2743 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2744 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2745
2746 @kindex --major-os-version
2747 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2748 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2749 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2750
2751 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2752 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2753 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2754 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2755
2756 @kindex --minor-image-version
2757 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2758 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --minor-os-version
2762 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2763 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2764 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2765
2766 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2767 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2768 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2769 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2770
2771 @cindex DEF files, creating
2772 @cindex DLLs, creating
2773 @kindex --output-def
2774 @item --output-def @var{file}
2775 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2776 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2777 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2778 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2779 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2780 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2781
2782 @cindex DLLs, creating
2783 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2784 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2785 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2786 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2787 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2788 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2789 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2790 execution are avoided.
2791 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2792
2793 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2794 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2795 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2796 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2797 default.
2798 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2799
2800 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2801 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2802 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2803 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2804 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2805 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2806 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2807 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2808 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2809 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2810
2811 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2812 @item --enable-auto-import
2813 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2814 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2815 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2816 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2817
2818 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2819 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2820
2821 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2822 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2823 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2824
2825 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2826 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2827 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2828 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2829 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2830
2831 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2832 see this message:
2833
2834 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2835 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2836
2837 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2838 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2839 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2840 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2841 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2842 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2843 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2844 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2845 the warning, and exit.
2846
2847 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2848 data type of the exported variable:
2849
2850 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2851 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2852 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2853
2854 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2855 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2856 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2857 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2858
2859 @example
2860 extern type extern_array[];
2861 extern_array[1] -->
2862 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2863 @end example
2864
2865 or
2866
2867 @example
2868 extern type extern_array[];
2869 extern_array[1] -->
2870 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2871 @end example
2872
2873 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2874 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2875
2876 @example
2877 extern struct s extern_struct;
2878 extern_struct.field -->
2879 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2880 @end example
2881
2882 or
2883
2884 @example
2885 extern long long extern_ll;
2886 extern_ll -->
2887 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2888 @end example
2889
2890 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2891 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2892 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2893 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2894 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2895 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2896 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2897 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2898
2899 Original:
2900 @example
2901 --foo.h
2902 extern int arr[];
2903 --foo.c
2904 #include "foo.h"
2905 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2906 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2907 @}
2908 @end example
2909
2910 Solution 1:
2911 @example
2912 --foo.h
2913 extern int arr[];
2914 --foo.c
2915 #include "foo.h"
2916 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2917 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2918 volatile int *parr = arr;
2919 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2920 @}
2921 @end example
2922
2923 Solution 2:
2924 @example
2925 --foo.h
2926 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2927 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2928 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2929 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2930 #else
2931 #define FOO_IMPORT
2932 #endif
2933 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2934 --foo.c
2935 #include "foo.h"
2936 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2937 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2938 @}
2939 @end example
2940
2941 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2942 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2943 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2944 functions).
2945
2946 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2947 @item --disable-auto-import
2948 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2949 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2950 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2951
2952 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2953 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2954 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2955 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2956 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2957 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2958 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2959
2960 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2961 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2962 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2963 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2964
2965 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2966 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2967 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2968 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2969
2970 @kindex --section-alignment
2971 @item --section-alignment
2972 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2973 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2974 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2975
2976 @cindex stack size
2977 @kindex --stack
2978 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2979 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2980 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2981 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2982 committed.
2983 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2984
2985 @kindex --subsystem
2986 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2987 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2988 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2989 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2990 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2991 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2992 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2993 @var{which}.
2994 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2995
2996 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2997 of the PE file header:
2998 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2999
3000 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3001 @item --high-entropy-va
3002 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3003 (ASLR).
3004
3005 @kindex --dynamicbase
3006 @item --dynamicbase
3007 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3008 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3009 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3010
3011 @kindex --forceinteg
3012 @item --forceinteg
3013 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3014
3015 @kindex --nxcompat
3016 @item --nxcompat
3017 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3018 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3019
3020 @kindex --no-isolation
3021 @item --no-isolation
3022 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3023
3024 @kindex --no-seh
3025 @item --no-seh
3026 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3027 this image.
3028
3029 @kindex --no-bind
3030 @item --no-bind
3031 Do not bind this image.
3032
3033 @kindex --wdmdriver
3034 @item --wdmdriver
3035 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3036
3037 @kindex --tsaware
3038 @item --tsaware
3039 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3040
3041 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3042 @item --insert-timestamp
3043 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3044 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3045 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3046 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3047 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3048 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3049 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3050 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3051 identically.
3052 @end table
3053
3054 @c man end
3055
3056 @ifset C6X
3057 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3058
3059 @c man begin OPTIONS
3060
3061 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3062 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3063 all executables use an index of 0.
3064
3065 @table @gcctabopt
3066
3067 @kindex --dsbt-size
3068 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3069 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3070 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3071 entries.
3072
3073 @kindex --dsbt-index
3074 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3075 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3076 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3077 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3078 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3079
3080 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3081 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3082 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3083
3084 @end table
3085
3086 @c man end
3087 @end ifset
3088
3089 @ifset CSKY
3090 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3091
3092 @c man begin OPTIONS
3093
3094 @table @gcctabopt
3095
3096 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3097 @item --branch-stub
3098 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3099 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3100 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3101 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3102 the compiler or assembler.
3103
3104 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3105 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3106 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3107 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3108 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3109 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3110 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3111 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3112 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3113
3114 @end table
3115
3116 @c man end
3117 @end ifset
3118
3119 @ifset M68HC11
3120 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3121
3122 @c man begin OPTIONS
3123
3124 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3125 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3126
3127 @table @gcctabopt
3128
3129 @kindex --no-trampoline
3130 @item --no-trampoline
3131 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3132 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3133 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3134
3135 @kindex --bank-window
3136 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3137 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3138 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3139 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3140 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3141
3142 @end table
3143
3144 @c man end
3145 @end ifset
3146
3147 @ifset M68K
3148 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3149
3150 @c man begin OPTIONS
3151
3152 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3153 when linking for 68K targets.
3154
3155 @table @gcctabopt
3156
3157 @kindex --got
3158 @item --got=@var{type}
3159 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3160 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3161 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3162 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3163
3164 @end table
3165
3166 @c man end
3167 @end ifset
3168
3169 @ifset MIPS
3170 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3171
3172 @c man begin OPTIONS
3173
3174 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3175 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3176 linking for MIPS targets.
3177
3178 @table @gcctabopt
3179
3180 @kindex --insn32
3181 @item --insn32
3182 @kindex --no-insn32
3183 @itemx --no-insn32
3184 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3185 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3186 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3187 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3188 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3189 possible.
3190
3191 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3192 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3193 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3194 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3195 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3196 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3197 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3198 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3199 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3200 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3201 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3202 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3203 an error.
3204
3205 @kindex --compact-branches
3206 @item --compact-branches
3207 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3208 @item --compact-branches
3209 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3210 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3211
3212 @end table
3213
3214 @c man end
3215 @end ifset
3216
3217 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3218 @node Environment
3219 @section Environment Variables
3220
3221 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3222
3223 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3224 @ifclear SingleFormat
3225 @code{GNUTARGET},
3226 @end ifclear
3227 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3228
3229 @ifclear SingleFormat
3230 @kindex GNUTARGET
3231 @cindex default input format
3232 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3233 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3234 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3235 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3236 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3237 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3238 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3239 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3240 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3241 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3242 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3243 @end ifclear
3244
3245 @kindex LDEMULATION
3246 @cindex default emulation
3247 @cindex emulation, default
3248 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3249 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3250 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3251 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3252 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3253 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3254 linker was configured.
3255
3256 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3257 @cindex demangling, default
3258 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3259 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3260 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3261 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3262 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3263 options.
3264
3265 @c man end
3266 @end ifset
3267
3268 @node Scripts
3269 @chapter Linker Scripts
3270
3271 @cindex scripts
3272 @cindex linker scripts
3273 @cindex command files
3274 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3275 written in the linker command language.
3276
3277 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3278 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3279 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3280 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3281 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3282 described below.
3283
3284 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3285 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3286 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3287 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3288 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3289
3290 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3291 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3292 default linker script.
3293
3294 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3295 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3296 Linker Scripts}.
3297
3298 @menu
3299 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3300 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3301 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3302 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3303 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3304 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3305 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3306 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3307 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3308 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3309 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3310 @end menu
3311
3312 @node Basic Script Concepts
3313 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3314 @cindex linker script concepts
3315 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3316 describe the linker script language.
3317
3318 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3319 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3320 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3321 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3322 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3323 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3324 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3325 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3326
3327 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3328 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3329 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3330 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3331 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3332 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3333 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3334 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3335 of debugging information.
3336
3337 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3338 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3339 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3340 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3341 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3342 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3343 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3344 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3345 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3346 RAM address would be the VMA.
3347
3348 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3349 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3350
3351 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3352 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3353 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3354 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3355 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3356 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3357 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3358
3359 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3360 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3361 option.
3362
3363 @node Script Format
3364 @section Linker Script Format
3365 @cindex linker script format
3366 Linker scripts are text files.
3367
3368 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3369 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3370 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3371 generally ignored.
3372
3373 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3374 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3375 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3376 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3377 file name.
3378
3379 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3380 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3381 to whitespace.
3382
3383 @node Simple Example
3384 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3385 @cindex linker script example
3386 @cindex example of linker script
3387 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3388
3389 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3390 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3391 memory layout of the output file.
3392
3393 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3394 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3395 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3396 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3397 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3398 your input files.
3399
3400 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3401 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3402 linker script which will do that:
3403 @smallexample
3404 SECTIONS
3405 @{
3406 . = 0x10000;
3407 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3408 . = 0x8000000;
3409 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3410 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3411 @}
3412 @end smallexample
3413
3414 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3415 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3416 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3417
3418 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3419 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3420 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3421 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3422 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3423 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3424 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3425
3426 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3427 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3428 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3429 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3430 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3431 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3432
3433 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3434 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3435 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3436
3437 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3438 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3439 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3440 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3441 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3442 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3443 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3444
3445 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3446 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3447 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3448 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3449 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3450 sections.
3451
3452 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3453
3454 @node Simple Commands
3455 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3456 @cindex linker script simple commands
3457 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3458
3459 @menu
3460 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3461 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3462 @ifclear SingleFormat
3463 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3464 @end ifclear
3465
3466 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3467 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3468 @end menu
3469
3470 @node Entry Point
3471 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3472 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3473 @cindex start of execution
3474 @cindex first instruction
3475 @cindex entry point
3476 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3477 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3478 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3479 @smallexample
3480 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3481 @end smallexample
3482
3483 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3484 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3485 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3486 @itemize @bullet
3487 @item
3488 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3489 @item
3490 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3491 @item
3492 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3493 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3494 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3495 @item
3496 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3497 @item
3498 The address @code{0}.
3499 @end itemize
3500
3501 @node File Commands
3502 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3503 @cindex linker script file commands
3504 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3505
3506 @table @code
3507 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3508 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3509 @cindex including a linker script
3510 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3511 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3512 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3513 10 levels deep.
3514
3515 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3516 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3517
3518 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3519 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3520 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3521 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3522 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3523 @cindex linker script input object files
3524 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3525 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3526
3527 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3528 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3529 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3530
3531 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3532 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3533
3534 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3535 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3536 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3537 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3538 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3539 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3540 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3541 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3542 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3543 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3544
3545 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3546 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3547 @samp{-l}.
3548
3549 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3550 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3551 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3552
3553 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3554 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3555 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3556 @cindex grouping input files
3557 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3558 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3559 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3560 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3561
3562 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3563 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3564 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3565 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3566 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3567 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3568 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3569 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3570 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3571 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3572 setting afterwards.
3573
3574 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3575 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3576 @cindex output file name in linker script
3577 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3578 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3579 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3580 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3581 precedence.
3582
3583 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3584 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3585
3586 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3587 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3588 @cindex library search path in linker script
3589 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3590 @cindex search path in linker script
3591 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3592 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3593 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3594 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3595 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3596 the command-line option are searched first.
3597
3598 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3599 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3600 @cindex first input file
3601 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3602 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3603 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3604 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3605 first file.
3606 @end table
3607
3608 @ifclear SingleFormat
3609 @node Format Commands
3610 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3611 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3612
3613 @table @code
3614 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3615 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3616 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3617 @cindex output file format in linker script
3618 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3619 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3620 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3621 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3622 line option takes precedence.
3623
3624 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3625 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3626 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3627 desired endianness.
3628
3629 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3630 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3631 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3632 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3633
3634 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3635 command:
3636 @smallexample
3637 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3638 @end smallexample
3639 This says that the default format for the output file is
3640 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3641 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3642 format.
3643
3644 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3645 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3646 @cindex input file format in linker script
3647 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3648 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3649 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3650 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3651 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3652 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3653 @end table
3654 @end ifclear
3655
3656 @node REGION_ALIAS
3657 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3658 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3659 @cindex region alias
3660 @cindex region names
3661
3662 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3663 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3664
3665 @smallexample
3666 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3667 @end smallexample
3668
3669 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3670 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3671 to memory regions. An example follows.
3672
3673 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3674 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3675 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3676 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3677 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3678 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3679 sections:
3680
3681 @itemize @bullet
3682 @item
3683 @code{.text} program code;
3684 @item
3685 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3686 @item
3687 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3688 @item
3689 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3690 @end itemize
3691
3692 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3693 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3694 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3695 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3696 @code{C}:
3697 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3698 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3699 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3700 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3701 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3702 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3703 @end multitable
3704 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3705 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3706 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3707 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3708
3709 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3710 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3711 memory layout:
3712 @smallexample
3713 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3714
3715 SECTIONS
3716 @{
3717 .text :
3718 @{
3719 *(.text)
3720 @} > REGION_TEXT
3721 .rodata :
3722 @{
3723 *(.rodata)
3724 rodata_end = .;
3725 @} > REGION_RODATA
3726 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3727 @{
3728 data_start = .;
3729 *(.data)
3730 @} > REGION_DATA
3731 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3732 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3733 .bss :
3734 @{
3735 *(.bss)
3736 @} > REGION_BSS
3737 @}
3738 @end smallexample
3739
3740 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3741 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3742 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3743 @table @code
3744 @item A
3745 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3746 @smallexample
3747 MEMORY
3748 @{
3749 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3750 @}
3751
3752 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3753 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3754 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3755 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3756 @end smallexample
3757 @item B
3758 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3759 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3760 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3761 @smallexample
3762 MEMORY
3763 @{
3764 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3765 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3766 @}
3767
3768 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3769 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3770 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3771 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3772 @end smallexample
3773 @item C
3774 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3775 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3776 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3777 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3778 @smallexample
3779 MEMORY
3780 @{
3781 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3782 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3783 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3784 @}
3785
3786 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3787 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3788 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3789 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3790 @end smallexample
3791 @end table
3792
3793 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3794 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3795 necessary:
3796 @smallexample
3797 #include <string.h>
3798
3799 extern char data_start [];
3800 extern char data_size [];
3801 extern char data_load_start [];
3802
3803 void copy_data(void)
3804 @{
3805 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3806 @{
3807 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3808 @}
3809 @}
3810 @end smallexample
3811
3812 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3813 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3814 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3815
3816 @table @code
3817 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3818 @kindex ASSERT
3819 @cindex assertion in linker script
3820 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3821 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3822
3823 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3824 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3825 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3826 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3827 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3828
3829 @smallexample
3830 .stack :
3831 @{
3832 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3833 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3834 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3835 @}
3836 @end smallexample
3837
3838 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3839 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3840 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3841
3842 @smallexample
3843 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3844 .stack :
3845 @{
3846 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3847 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3848 @}
3849 @end smallexample
3850
3851 will work.
3852
3853 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3854 @kindex EXTERN
3855 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3856 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3857 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3858 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3859 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3860 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3861
3862 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3863 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3864 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3865 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3866 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3867 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3868
3869 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3870 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3871 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3872 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3873 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3874 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3875
3876 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3877 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3878 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3879 @cindex section groups
3880 @cindex COMDAT
3881 This command has the same effect as the
3882 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3883 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3884 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3885 specified (@samp{-r}).
3886
3887 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3888 @kindex INSERT
3889 @cindex insert user script into default script
3890 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3891 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3892 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3893 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3894 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3895 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3896 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3897 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3898 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3899 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3900 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3901 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3902 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3903
3904 @smallexample
3905 SECTIONS
3906 @{
3907 OVERLAY :
3908 @{
3909 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3910 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3911 @}
3912 @}
3913 INSERT AFTER .text;
3914 @end smallexample
3915
3916 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3917 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3918 @cindex cross references
3919 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3920 references among certain output sections.
3921
3922 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3923 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3924 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3925 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3926 a function defined in the other section.
3927
3928 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3929 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3930 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3931 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3932 names.
3933
3934 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3935 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3936 @cindex cross references
3937 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3938 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3939
3940 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3941 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3942 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3943 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3944 must never call back.
3945
3946 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3947 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3948 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3949 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3950 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3951 names, not input section names.
3952
3953 @ifclear SingleFormat
3954 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3955 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3956 @cindex machine architecture
3957 @cindex architecture
3958 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3959 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3960 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3961 the @samp{-f} option.
3962 @end ifclear
3963
3964 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3965 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3966 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3967 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3968 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3969 @xref{Expression Section}.
3970 @end table
3971
3972 @node Assignments
3973 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3974 @cindex assignment in scripts
3975 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3976 @cindex variables, defining
3977 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3978 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3979
3980 @menu
3981 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3982 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3983 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3984 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3985 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3986 @end menu
3987
3988 @node Simple Assignments
3989 @subsection Simple Assignments
3990
3991 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3992
3993 @table @code
3994 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3995 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3996 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3997 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3998 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3999 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4000 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4001 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4002 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4003 @end table
4004
4005 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4006 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4007 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4008
4009 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4010 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4011
4012 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4013
4014 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4015
4016 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4017 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4018 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4019
4020 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4021 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4022
4023 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4024 assignments may be used:
4025
4026 @smallexample
4027 floating_point = 0;
4028 SECTIONS
4029 @{
4030 .text :
4031 @{
4032 *(.text)
4033 _etext = .;
4034 @}
4035 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4036 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4037 @}
4038 @end smallexample
4039 @noindent
4040 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4041 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4042 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4043 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4044 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4045
4046 @node HIDDEN
4047 @subsection HIDDEN
4048 @cindex HIDDEN
4049 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4050 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4051
4052 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4053 @code{HIDDEN}:
4054
4055 @smallexample
4056 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4057 SECTIONS
4058 @{
4059 .text :
4060 @{
4061 *(.text)
4062 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4063 @}
4064 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4065 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4066 @}
4067 @end smallexample
4068 @noindent
4069 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4070
4071 @node PROVIDE
4072 @subsection PROVIDE
4073 @cindex PROVIDE
4074 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4075 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4076 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4077 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4078 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4079 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4080 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4081 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4082
4083 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4084 @smallexample
4085 SECTIONS
4086 @{
4087 .text :
4088 @{
4089 *(.text)
4090 _etext = .;
4091 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4092 @}
4093 @}
4094 @end smallexample
4095
4096 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4097 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4098 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4099 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4100 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4101 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4102
4103 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4104 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4105 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4106 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4107 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4108
4109 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4110 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4111 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4112 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4113 hidden and won't be exported.
4114
4115 @node Source Code Reference
4116 @subsection Source Code Reference
4117
4118 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4119 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4120 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4121 symbol that does not have a value.
4122
4123 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4124 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4125 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4126 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4127 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4128 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4129 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4130 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4131
4132 @smallexample
4133 extern int foo;
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4137
4138 @smallexample
4139 _foo = 1000;
4140 @end smallexample
4141
4142 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4143 transformation has taken place.
4144
4145 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4146 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4147 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4148 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4149 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4150 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4151 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4152
4153 @smallexample
4154 int foo = 1000;
4155 @end smallexample
4156
4157 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4158 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4159 number 1000 is initially stored.
4160
4161 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4162 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4163 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4164 So:
4165
4166 @smallexample
4167 foo = 1;
4168 @end smallexample
4169
4170 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4171 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4172 address. Whereas:
4173
4174 @smallexample
4175 int * a = & foo;
4176 @end smallexample
4177
4178 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4179 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4180 the variable @samp{a}.
4181
4182 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4183 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4184 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4185
4186 @smallexample
4187 foo = 1000;
4188 @end smallexample
4189
4190 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4191 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4192 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4193 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4194 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4195
4196 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4197 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4198 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4199 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4200 linker script contains these declarations:
4201
4202 @smallexample
4203 @group
4204 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4205 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4206 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4207 @end group
4208 @end smallexample
4209
4210 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4211
4212 @smallexample
4213 @group
4214 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4215
4216 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4217 @end group
4218 @end smallexample
4219
4220 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4221 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4222 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4223
4224 @smallexample
4225 @group
4226 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4227
4228 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4229 @end group
4230 @end smallexample
4231
4232 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4233 operators.
4234
4235 @node SECTIONS
4236 @section SECTIONS Command
4237 @kindex SECTIONS
4238 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4239 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4240
4241 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4242 @smallexample
4243 SECTIONS
4244 @{
4245 @var{sections-command}
4246 @var{sections-command}
4247 @dots{}
4248 @}
4249 @end smallexample
4250
4251 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4252
4253 @itemize @bullet
4254 @item
4255 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4256 @item
4257 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4258 @item
4259 an output section description
4260 @item
4261 an overlay description
4262 @end itemize
4263
4264 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4265 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4266 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4267 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4268 the layout of the output file.
4269
4270 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4271 below.
4272
4273 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4274 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4275 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4276 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4277 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4278 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4279
4280 @menu
4281 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4282 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4283 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4284 * Input Section:: Input section description
4285 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4286 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4287 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4288 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4289 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4290 @end menu
4291
4292 @node Output Section Description
4293 @subsection Output Section Description
4294 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4295 @smallexample
4296 @group
4297 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4298 [AT(@var{lma})]
4299 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4300 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4301 [@var{constraint}]
4302 @{
4303 @var{output-section-command}
4304 @var{output-section-command}
4305 @dots{}
4306 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4307 @end group
4308 @end smallexample
4309
4310 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4311
4312 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4313 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4314 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4315 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4316 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4317
4318 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4319
4320 @itemize @bullet
4321 @item
4322 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4323 @item
4324 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4325 @item
4326 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4327 @item
4328 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4329 @end itemize
4330
4331 @node Output Section Name
4332 @subsection Output Section Name
4333 @cindex name, section
4334 @cindex section name
4335 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4336 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4337 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4338 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4339 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4340 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4341 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4342 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4343 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4344 commas must be quoted.
4345
4346 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4347 Discarding}.
4348
4349 @node Output Section Address
4350 @subsection Output Section Address
4351 @cindex address, section
4352 @cindex section address
4353 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4354 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4355 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4356
4357 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4358 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4359 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4360 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4361 contained within the output section.
4362
4363 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4364
4365 @itemize @bullet
4366 @item
4367 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4368 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4369 in that region.
4370
4371 @item
4372 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4373 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4374 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4375 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4376
4377 @item
4378 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4379 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4380 counter.
4381 @end itemize
4382
4383 @noindent
4384 For example:
4385
4386 @smallexample
4387 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4388 @end smallexample
4389
4390 @noindent
4391 and
4392
4393 @smallexample
4394 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4395 @end smallexample
4396
4397 @noindent
4398 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4399 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4400 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4401 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4402 input sections.
4403
4404 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4405 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4406 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4407 do something like this:
4408 @smallexample
4409 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4410 @end smallexample
4411 @noindent
4412 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4413 aligned upward to the specified value.
4414
4415 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4416 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4417 sections are ignored).
4418
4419 @node Input Section
4420 @subsection Input Section Description
4421 @cindex input sections
4422 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4423 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4424
4425 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4426 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4427 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4428 map the input files into your memory layout.
4429
4430 @menu
4431 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4432 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4433 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4434 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4435 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4436 @end menu
4437
4438 @node Input Section Basics
4439 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4440 @cindex input section basics
4441 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4442 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4443
4444 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4445 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4446
4447 The most common input section description is to include all input
4448 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4449 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4450 @smallexample
4451 *(.text)
4452 @end smallexample
4453 @noindent
4454 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4455 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4456 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4457 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4458 example:
4459 @smallexample
4460 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4461 @end smallexample
4462 @noindent
4463 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4464 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4465 placed inside the section list, for example:
4466 @smallexample
4467 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4468 @end smallexample
4469 @noindent
4470 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4471 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4472 more than one section, as described below.
4473
4474 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4475 @smallexample
4476 *(.text .rdata)
4477 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4478 @end smallexample
4479 @noindent
4480 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4481 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4482 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4483 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4484 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4485 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4486
4487 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4488 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4489 immediately following section, for example:
4490 @smallexample
4491 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4492 @end smallexample
4493 @noindent
4494 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4495 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4496 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4497 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4498 could be modified to:
4499 @smallexample
4500 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4501 @end smallexample
4502 @noindent
4503 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4504 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4505 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4506 @smallexample
4507 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4508 @end smallexample
4509
4510 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4511 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4512 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4513 @smallexample
4514 data.o(.data)
4515 @end smallexample
4516
4517 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4518 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4519
4520 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4521
4522 @smallexample
4523 @group
4524 SECTIONS @{
4525 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4526 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4527 @}
4528 @end group
4529 @end smallexample
4530
4531 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4532 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4533 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4534 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4535 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4536
4537 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4538 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4539 with no whitespace around the colon.
4540
4541 @table @samp
4542 @item archive:file
4543 matches file within archive
4544 @item archive:
4545 matches the whole archive
4546 @item :file
4547 matches file but not one in an archive
4548 @end table
4549
4550 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4551 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4552 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4553 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4554 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4555 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4556 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4557 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4558 command.
4559
4560 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4561 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4562 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4563 @smallexample
4564 data.o
4565 @end smallexample
4566
4567 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4568 and does not contain any wild card
4569 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4570 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4571 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4572 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4573 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4574 the archive search path.
4575
4576 @node Input Section Wildcards
4577 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4578 @cindex input section wildcards
4579 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4580 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4581 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4582 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4583 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4584
4585 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4586 pattern for the file name.
4587
4588 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4589
4590 @table @samp
4591 @item *
4592 matches any number of characters
4593 @item ?
4594 matches any single character
4595 @item [@var{chars}]
4596 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4597 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4598 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4599 @item \
4600 quotes the following character
4601 @end table
4602
4603 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4604 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4605 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4606 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4607 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4608 a @samp{/} character.
4609
4610 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4611 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4612 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4613
4614 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4615 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4616 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4617 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4618 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4619 @smallexample
4620 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4621 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4622 @end smallexample
4623
4624 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4625 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4626 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4627 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4628 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4629 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4630 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4631
4632 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4633 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4634 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4635 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4636 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4637 needed.
4638
4639 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4640 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4641 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4642 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4643 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4644 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4645 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4646 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4647
4648 @cindex SORT
4649 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4650
4651 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4652 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4653
4654 @enumerate
4655 @item
4656 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4657 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4658 sections have the same name.
4659 @item
4660 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4661 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4662 sections have the same alignment.
4663 @item
4664 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4665 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4666 @item
4667 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4668 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4669 @item
4670 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4671 @end enumerate
4672
4673 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4674 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4675 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4676
4677 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4678 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4679 treated as nested sorting command.
4680
4681 @enumerate
4682 @item
4683 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4684 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4685 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4686 @item
4687 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4688 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4689 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4690 @end enumerate
4691
4692 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4693 command-line option will be ignored.
4694
4695 @cindex SORT_NONE
4696 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4697 section sorting option.
4698
4699 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4700 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4701 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4702
4703 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4704 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4705 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4706 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4707 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4708 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4709 @smallexample
4710 @group
4711 SECTIONS @{
4712 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4713 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4714 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4715 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4716 @}
4717 @end group
4718 @end smallexample
4719
4720 @node Input Section Common
4721 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4722 @cindex common symbol placement
4723 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4724 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4725 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4726 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4727 named @samp{COMMON}.
4728
4729 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4730 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4731 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4732 input files are placed in another section.
4733
4734 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4735 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4736 @smallexample
4737 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4738 @end smallexample
4739
4740 @cindex scommon section
4741 @cindex small common symbols
4742 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4743 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4744 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4745 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4746 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4747 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4748 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4749 locations.
4750
4751 @cindex [COMMON]
4752 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4753 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4754 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4755
4756 @node Input Section Keep
4757 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4758 @cindex KEEP
4759 @cindex garbage collection
4760 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4761 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4762 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4763 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4764 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4765
4766 @node Input Section Example
4767 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4768 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4769 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4770 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4771 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4772 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4773 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4774 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4775 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4776 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4777
4778 @smallexample
4779 @group
4780 SECTIONS @{
4781 outputa 0x10000 :
4782 @{
4783 all.o
4784 foo.o (.input1)
4785 @}
4786 @end group
4787 @group
4788 outputb :
4789 @{
4790 foo.o (.input2)
4791 foo1.o (.input1)
4792 @}
4793 @end group
4794 @group
4795 outputc :
4796 @{
4797 *(.input1)
4798 *(.input2)
4799 @}
4800 @}
4801 @end group
4802 @end smallexample
4803
4804 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4805 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4806 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4807 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4808 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4809 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4810 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4811
4812 @node Output Section Data
4813 @subsection Output Section Data
4814 @cindex data
4815 @cindex section data
4816 @cindex output section data
4817 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4818 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4819 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4820 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4821 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4822 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4823 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4824 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4825 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4826 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4827 counter.
4828
4829 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4830 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4831 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4832 stored.
4833
4834 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4835 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4836 @smallexample
4837 BYTE(1)
4838 LONG(addr)
4839 @end smallexample
4840
4841 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4842 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4843 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4844 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4845 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4846
4847 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4848 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4849 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4850 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4851 endianness of the first input object file.
4852
4853 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4854 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4855 @smallexample
4856 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4857 @end smallexample
4858 whereas this will work:
4859 @smallexample
4860 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4861 @end smallexample
4862
4863 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4864 @cindex holes, filling
4865 @cindex unspecified memory
4866 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4867 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4868 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4869 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4870 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4871 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4872 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4873 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4874 different parts of an output section.
4875
4876 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4877 value @samp{0x90}:
4878 @smallexample
4879 FILL(0x90909090)
4880 @end smallexample
4881
4882 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4883 section attribute, but it only affects the
4884 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4885 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4886 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4887 expression.
4888
4889 @node Output Section Keywords
4890 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4891 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4892 commands.
4893
4894 @table @code
4895 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4896 @cindex input filename symbols
4897 @cindex filename symbols
4898 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4899 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4900 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4901 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4902 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4903
4904 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4905 normally used for any other object file format.
4906
4907 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4908 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4909 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4910 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4911 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4912 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4913 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4914 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4915 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4916 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4917 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4918 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4919 ignored for other object file formats.
4920
4921 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4922 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4923 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4924 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4925 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4926 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4927 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4928 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4929 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4930 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4931 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4932 @code{exit}.
4933
4934 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4935 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4936 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4937 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4938 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4939 runtime code expects to see.
4940
4941 @smallexample
4942 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4943 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4944 *(.ctors)
4945 LONG(0)
4946 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4947 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4948 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4949 *(.dtors)
4950 LONG(0)
4951 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4952 @end smallexample
4953
4954 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4955 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4956 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4957 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4958 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4959 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4960 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4961 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4962
4963 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4964 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4965 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4966 scripts.
4967
4968 @end table
4969
4970 @node Output Section Discarding
4971 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4972 @cindex discarding sections
4973 @cindex sections, discarding
4974 @cindex removing sections
4975 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4976 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4977 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4978 @smallexample
4979 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4980 @end smallexample
4981 @noindent
4982 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4983 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4984 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4985 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4986 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4987 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4988 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4989 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4990 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4991
4992 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4993 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4994 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4995 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4996 section is discarded.
4997
4998 @cindex /DISCARD/
4999 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5000 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5001 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5002
5003 @node Output Section Attributes
5004 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5005 @cindex output section attributes
5006 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5007 like this:
5008
5009 @smallexample
5010 @group
5011 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5012 [AT(@var{lma})]
5013 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5014 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5015 [@var{constraint}]
5016 @{
5017 @var{output-section-command}
5018 @var{output-section-command}
5019 @dots{}
5020 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5021 @end group
5022 @end smallexample
5023
5024 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5025 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5026 remaining section attributes.
5027
5028 @menu
5029 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5030 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5031 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5032 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5033 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5034 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5035 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5036 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5037 @end menu
5038
5039 @node Output Section Type
5040 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5041 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5042 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5043
5044 @table @code
5045 @item NOLOAD
5046 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5047 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5048 @item DSECT
5049 @itemx COPY
5050 @itemx INFO
5051 @itemx OVERLAY
5052 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5053 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5054 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5055 section when the program is run.
5056 @end table
5057
5058 @kindex NOLOAD
5059 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5060 @cindex loading, preventing
5061 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5062 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5063 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5064 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5065 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5066 @smallexample
5067 @group
5068 SECTIONS @{
5069 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5070 @dots{}
5071 @}
5072 @end group
5073 @end smallexample
5074
5075 @node Output Section LMA
5076 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5077 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5078 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5079 @cindex load address
5080 @cindex section load address
5081 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5082 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5083 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5084 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5085 address is optional.
5086
5087 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5088 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5089 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5090 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5091 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5092
5093 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5094 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5095 load address:
5096
5097 @itemize @bullet
5098 @item
5099 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5100 the LMA address as well.
5101
5102 @item
5103 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5104
5105 @item
5106 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5107 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5108 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5109 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5110 the last section in the located region.
5111
5112 @item
5113 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5114 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5115
5116 @item
5117 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5118 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5119 @end itemize
5120
5121 @cindex ROM initialized data
5122 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5123 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5124 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5125 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5126 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5127 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5128 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5129 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5130 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5131
5132 @smallexample
5133 @group
5134 SECTIONS
5135 @{
5136 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5137 .mdata 0x2000 :
5138 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5139 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5140 .bss 0x3000 :
5141 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5142 @}
5143 @end group
5144 @end smallexample
5145
5146 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5147 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5148 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5149 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5150 script.
5151
5152 @smallexample
5153 @group
5154 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5155 char *src = &_etext;
5156 char *dst = &_data;
5157
5158 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5159 while (dst < &_edata)
5160 *dst++ = *src++;
5161
5162 /* Zero bss. */
5163 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5164 *dst = 0;
5165 @end group
5166 @end smallexample
5167
5168 @node Forced Output Alignment
5169 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5170 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5171 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5172 @cindex output section alignment
5173 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5174 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5175 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5176
5177 @node Forced Input Alignment
5178 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5179 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5180 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5181 @cindex input section alignment
5182 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5183 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5184 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5185
5186 @node Output Section Constraint
5187 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5188 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5189 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5190 @cindex constraints on output sections
5191 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5192 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5193 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5194 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5195
5196 @node Output Section Region
5197 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5198 @kindex >@var{region}
5199 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5200 @cindex memory regions and sections
5201 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5202 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5203
5204 Here is a simple example:
5205 @smallexample
5206 @group
5207 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5208 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5209 @end group
5210 @end smallexample
5211
5212 @node Output Section Phdr
5213 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5214 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5215 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5216 @cindex program headers and sections
5217 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5218 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5219 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5220 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5221 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5222 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5223
5224 Here is a simple example:
5225 @smallexample
5226 @group
5227 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5228 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5229 @end group
5230 @end smallexample
5231
5232 @node Output Section Fill
5233 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5234 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5235 @cindex section fill pattern
5236 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5237 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5238 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5239 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5240 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5241 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5242 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5243 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5244 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5245 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5246 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5247 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5248 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5249
5250 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5251 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5252
5253 Here is a simple example:
5254 @smallexample
5255 @group
5256 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5257 @end group
5258 @end smallexample
5259
5260 @node Overlay Description
5261 @subsection Overlay Description
5262 @kindex OVERLAY
5263 @cindex overlays
5264 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5265 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5266 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5267 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5268 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5269 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5270 than another.
5271
5272 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5273 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5274 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5275 command is as follows:
5276 @smallexample
5277 @group
5278 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5279 @{
5280 @var{secname1}
5281 @{
5282 @var{output-section-command}
5283 @var{output-section-command}
5284 @dots{}
5285 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5286 @var{secname2}
5287 @{
5288 @var{output-section-command}
5289 @var{output-section-command}
5290 @dots{}
5291 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5292 @dots{}
5293 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5294 @end group
5295 @end smallexample
5296
5297 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5298 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5299 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5300 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5301 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5302 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5303
5304 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5305 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5306
5307 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5308 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5309 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5310 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5311 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5312 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5313
5314 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5315 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5316 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5317 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5318 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5319
5320 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5321 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5322 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5323 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5324 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5325 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5326 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5327
5328 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5329 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5330
5331 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5332 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5333 @smallexample
5334 @group
5335 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5336 @{
5337 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5338 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5339 @}
5340 @end group
5341 @end smallexample
5342 @noindent
5343 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5344 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5345 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5346 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5347 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5348 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5349
5350 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5351 like the following.
5352
5353 @smallexample
5354 @group
5355 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5356 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5357 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5358 @end group
5359 @end smallexample
5360
5361 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5362 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5363 example could have been written identically as follows.
5364
5365 @smallexample
5366 @group
5367 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5368 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5369 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5370 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5371 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5372 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5373 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5374 @end group
5375 @end smallexample
5376
5377 @node MEMORY
5378 @section MEMORY Command
5379 @kindex MEMORY
5380 @cindex memory regions
5381 @cindex regions of memory
5382 @cindex allocating memory
5383 @cindex discontinuous memory
5384 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5385 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5386
5387 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5388 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5389 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5390 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5391 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5392 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5393 around to fit into the available regions.
5394
5395 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5396 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5397 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5398 @code{MEMORY} is:
5399 @smallexample
5400 @group
5401 MEMORY
5402 @{
5403 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5404 @dots{}
5405 @}
5406 @end group
5407 @end smallexample
5408
5409 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5410 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5411 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5412 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5413 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5414 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5415 command.
5416
5417 @cindex memory region attributes
5418 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5419 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5420 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5421 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5422 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5423 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5424 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5425
5426 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5427 @table @samp
5428 @item R
5429 Read-only section
5430 @item W
5431 Read/write section
5432 @item X
5433 Executable section
5434 @item A
5435 Allocatable section
5436 @item I
5437 Initialized section
5438 @item L
5439 Same as @samp{I}
5440 @item !
5441 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5442 @end table
5443
5444 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5445 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5446 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5447 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5448 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5449 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5450 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5451 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5452
5453 @kindex ORIGIN =
5454 @kindex o =
5455 @kindex org =
5456 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5457 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5458 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5459 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5460 @code{ORG}).
5461
5462 @kindex LENGTH =
5463 @kindex len =
5464 @kindex l =
5465 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5466 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5467 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5468 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5469
5470 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5471 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5472 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5473 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5474 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5475 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5476 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5477 region.
5478
5479 @smallexample
5480 @group
5481 MEMORY
5482 @{
5483 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5484 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5485 @}
5486 @end group
5487 @end smallexample
5488
5489 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5490 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5491 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5492 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5493 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5494 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5495 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5496 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5497 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5498
5499 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5500 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5501 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5502
5503 @smallexample
5504 @group
5505 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5506 @end group
5507 @end smallexample
5508
5509 @node PHDRS
5510 @section PHDRS Command
5511 @kindex PHDRS
5512 @cindex program headers
5513 @cindex ELF program headers
5514 @cindex program segments
5515 @cindex segments, ELF
5516 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5517 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5518 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5519 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5520
5521 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5522 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5523 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5524 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5525 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5526
5527 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5528 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5529 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5530 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5531 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5532
5533 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5534 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5535 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5536
5537 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5538 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5539
5540 @smallexample
5541 @group
5542 PHDRS
5543 @{
5544 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5545 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5546 @}
5547 @end group
5548 @end smallexample
5549
5550 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5551 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5552 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5553 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5554 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5555 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5556
5557 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5558 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5559 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5560 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5561 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5562 Section Phdr}.
5563
5564 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5565 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5566 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5567 contain the section.
5568
5569 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5570 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5571 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5572 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5573 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5574 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5575 segment at all.
5576
5577 @kindex FILEHDR
5578 @kindex PHDRS
5579 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5580 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5581 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5582 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5583 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5584 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5585 these keywords.
5586
5587 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5588 value of the keyword.
5589
5590 @table @asis
5591 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5592 Indicates an unused program header.
5593
5594 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5595 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5596 the file.
5597
5598 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5599 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5600
5601 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5602 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5603 found.
5604
5605 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5606 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5607
5608 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5609 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5610 ABI.
5611
5612 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5613 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5614
5615 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5616 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5617
5618 @item @var{expression}
5619 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5620 be used for types not defined above.
5621 @end table
5622
5623 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5624 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5625 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5626 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5627 output section attribute.
5628
5629 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5630 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5631 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5632 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5633 header.
5634
5635 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5636 headers used on a native ELF system.
5637
5638 @example
5639 @group
5640 PHDRS
5641 @{
5642 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5643 interp PT_INTERP ;
5644 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5645 data PT_LOAD ;
5646 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5647 @}
5648
5649 SECTIONS
5650 @{
5651 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5652 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5653 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5654 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5655 @dots{}
5656 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5657 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5658 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5659 @dots{}
5660 @}
5661 @end group
5662 @end example
5663
5664 @node VERSION
5665 @section VERSION Command
5666 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5667 @cindex symbol versions
5668 @cindex version script
5669 @cindex versions of symbols
5670 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5671 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5672 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5673 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5674 shared library.
5675
5676 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5677 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5678 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5679
5680 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5681 @smallexample
5682 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5683 @end smallexample
5684
5685 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5686 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5687 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5688 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5689 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5690 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5691 library.
5692
5693 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5694 examples.
5695
5696 @smallexample
5697 VERS_1.1 @{
5698 global:
5699 foo1;
5700 local:
5701 old*;
5702 original*;
5703 new*;
5704 @};
5705
5706 VERS_1.2 @{
5707 foo2;
5708 @} VERS_1.1;
5709
5710 VERS_2.0 @{
5711 bar1; bar2;
5712 extern "C++" @{
5713 ns::*;
5714 "f(int, double)";
5715 @};
5716 @} VERS_1.2;
5717 @end smallexample
5718
5719 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5720 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5721 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5722 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5723 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5724 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5725 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5726 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5727 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5728 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5729
5730 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5731 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5732 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5733
5734 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5735 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5736 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5737
5738 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5739 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5740 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5741 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5742 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5743 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5744 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5745 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5746 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5747
5748 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5749 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5750 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5751 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5752
5753 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5754 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5755 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5756 won't.
5757
5758 @smallexample
5759 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5760 @end smallexample
5761
5762 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5763 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5764 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5765 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5766 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5767 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5768 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5769 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5770 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5771 search for each symbol reference.
5772
5773 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5774 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5775 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5776 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5777 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5778 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5779 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5780 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5781 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5782
5783 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5784 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5785 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5786 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5787 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5788 @smallexample
5789 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5790 @end smallexample
5791 @noindent
5792 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5793 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5794 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5795 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5796 takes precedence over a version script.
5797
5798 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5799 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5800 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5801 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5802 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5803
5804 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5805 source file. Here is an example:
5806
5807 @smallexample
5808 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5809 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5810 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5811 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5812 @end smallexample
5813
5814 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5815 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5816 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5817 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5818
5819 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5820 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5821 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5822 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5823 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5824 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5825
5826 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5827 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5828 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5829 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5830
5831 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5832
5833 @smallexample
5834 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5835 @end smallexample
5836
5837 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5838 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5839 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5840 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5841 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5842
5843 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5844 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5845 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5846 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5847 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5848 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5849 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5850 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5851 expect when you upgrade.
5852
5853 @node Expressions
5854 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5855 @cindex expressions
5856 @cindex arithmetic
5857 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5858 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5859 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5860 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5861
5862 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5863
5864 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5865 expressions.
5866
5867 @menu
5868 * Constants:: Constants
5869 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5870 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5871 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5872 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5873 * Operators:: Operators
5874 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5875 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5876 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5877 @end menu
5878
5879 @node Constants
5880 @subsection Constants
5881 @cindex integer notation
5882 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5883 All constants are integers.
5884
5885 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5886 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5887 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5888 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5889 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5890 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5891
5892 @cindex scaled integers
5893 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5894 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5895 @cindex suffixes for integers
5896 @cindex integer suffixes
5897 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5898 constant by
5899 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5900 @ifnottex
5901 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5902 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5903 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5904 @end ifnottex
5905 @tex
5906 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5907 @end tex
5908 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5909 respectively. For example, the following
5910 all refer to the same quantity:
5911
5912 @smallexample
5913 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5914 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5915 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5916 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5917 @end smallexample
5918
5919 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5920 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5921
5922 @node Symbolic Constants
5923 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5924 @cindex symbolic constants
5925 @kindex CONSTANT
5926 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5927 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5928
5929 @table @code
5930 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5931 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5932 The target's maximum page size.
5933
5934 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5935 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5936 The target's default page size.
5937 @end table
5938
5939 So for example:
5940
5941 @smallexample
5942 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5943 @end smallexample
5944
5945 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5946 supported by the target.
5947
5948 @node Symbols
5949 @subsection Symbol Names
5950 @cindex symbol names
5951 @cindex names
5952 @cindex quoted symbol names
5953 @kindex "
5954 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5955 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5956 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5957 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5958 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5959 @smallexample
5960 "SECTION" = 9;
5961 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5962 @end smallexample
5963
5964 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5965 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5966 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5967
5968 @node Orphan Sections
5969 @subsection Orphan Sections
5970 @cindex orphan
5971 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5972 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5973 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5974 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5975 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5976
5977 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5978 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5979 placed at the end of that output section.
5980
5981 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5982 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5983 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5984 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5985 one new output section.
5986
5987 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5988 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5989 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5990 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5991 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5992 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5993 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5994
5995 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5996 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5997 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5998
5999 @node Location Counter
6000 @subsection The Location Counter
6001 @kindex .
6002 @cindex dot
6003 @cindex location counter
6004 @cindex current output location
6005 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6006 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6007 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6008 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6009 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6010
6011 @cindex holes
6012 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6013 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6014 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6015 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6016 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6017
6018 @smallexample
6019 SECTIONS
6020 @{
6021 output :
6022 @{
6023 file1(.text)
6024 . = . + 1000;
6025 file2(.text)
6026 . += 1000;
6027 file3(.text)
6028 @} = 0x12345678;
6029 @}
6030 @end smallexample
6031 @noindent
6032 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6033 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6034 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6035 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6036 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6037 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6038
6039 @cindex dot inside sections
6040 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6041 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6042 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6043 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6044 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6045 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6046
6047 @smallexample
6048 SECTIONS
6049 @{
6050 . = 0x100
6051 .text: @{
6052 *(.text)
6053 . = 0x200
6054 @}
6055 . = 0x500
6056 .data: @{
6057 *(.data)
6058 . += 0x600
6059 @}
6060 @}
6061 @end smallexample
6062
6063 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6064 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6065 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6066 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6067 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6068 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6069 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6070 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6071
6072 @cindex dot outside sections
6073 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6074 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6075 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6076
6077 @smallexample
6078 SECTIONS
6079 @{
6080 start_of_text = . ;
6081 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6082 end_of_text = . ;
6083
6084 start_of_data = . ;
6085 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6086 end_of_data = . ;
6087 @}
6088 @end smallexample
6089
6090 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6091 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6092 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6093 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6094 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6095 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6096 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6097 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6098 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6099 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6100 as follows:
6101
6102 @smallexample
6103 SECTIONS
6104 @{
6105 start_of_text = . ;
6106 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6107 end_of_text = . ;
6108
6109 start_of_data = . ;
6110 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6111 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6112 end_of_data = . ;
6113 @}
6114 @end smallexample
6115
6116 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6117 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6118 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6119 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6120 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6121 section. So you could write:
6122
6123 @smallexample
6124 SECTIONS
6125 @{
6126 start_of_text = . ;
6127 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6128 end_of_text = . ;
6129
6130 . = . ;
6131 start_of_data = . ;
6132 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6133 end_of_data = . ;
6134 @}
6135 @end smallexample
6136
6137 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6138 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6139
6140 @need 2000
6141 @node Operators
6142 @subsection Operators
6143 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6144 @cindex arithmetic operators
6145 @cindex precedence in expressions
6146 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6147 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6148 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6149 @ifnottex
6150 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6151 @smallexample
6152 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6153 (highest)
6154 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6155 2 left * / %
6156 3 left + -
6157 4 left >> <<
6158 5 left == != > < <= >=
6159 6 left &
6160 7 left |
6161 8 left &&
6162 9 left ||
6163 10 right ? :
6164 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6165 (lowest)
6166 @end smallexample
6167 Notes:
6168 (1) Prefix operators
6169 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6170 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6171 @end ifnottex
6172 @tex
6173 \vskip \baselineskip
6174 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6175 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6176 \hrule
6177 \halign
6178 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6179 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6180 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6181 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6182 \noalign{\hrule}
6183 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6184 &highest&&&&&\cr
6185 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6186 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6187 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6188 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6189 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6190 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6191 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6192 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6193 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6194 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6195 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6196 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6197 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6198 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6199 \hrule}
6200 @end tex
6201 @iftex
6202 {
6203 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6204 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6205 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6206 }
6207 @end iftex
6208 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6209
6210 @node Evaluation
6211 @subsection Evaluation
6212 @cindex lazy evaluation
6213 @cindex expression evaluation order
6214 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6215 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6216
6217 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6218 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6219 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6220 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6221
6222 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6223 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6224 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6225 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6226
6227 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6228 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6229 allocation.
6230
6231 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6232 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6233
6234 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6235 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6236 following
6237 @smallexample
6238 @group
6239 SECTIONS
6240 @{
6241 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6242 @{ *(.text) @}
6243 @}
6244 @end group
6245 @end smallexample
6246 @noindent
6247 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6248 address}.
6249
6250 @node Expression Section
6251 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6252 @cindex expression sections
6253 @cindex absolute expressions
6254 @cindex relative expressions
6255 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6256 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6257 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6258 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6259 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6260 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6261 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6262 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6263 operations.
6264
6265 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6266 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6267 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6268 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6269 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6270 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6271 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6272 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6273 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6274 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6275 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6276 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6277 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6278 everywhere.
6279
6280 In the following simple example,
6281
6282 @smallexample
6283 @group
6284 SECTIONS
6285 @{
6286 . = 0x100;
6287 __executable_start = 0x100;
6288 .data :
6289 @{
6290 . = 0x10;
6291 __data_start = 0x10;
6292 *(.data)
6293 @}
6294 @dots{}
6295 @}
6296 @end group
6297 @end smallexample
6298
6299 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6300 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6301 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6302 section in the second two assignments.
6303
6304 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6305 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6306
6307 @itemize @bullet
6308 @item
6309 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6310 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6311 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6312 @item
6313 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6314 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6315 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6316 @item
6317 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6318 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6319 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6320 before applying the operator.
6321 @end itemize
6322
6323 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6324
6325 @itemize @bullet
6326 @item
6327 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6328 @item
6329 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6330 @item
6331 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6332 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6333 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6334 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6335 but an absolute address otherwise.
6336 @item
6337 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6338 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6339 section as the relative operand(s).
6340 @item
6341 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6342 conversions) is an absolute address.
6343 @end itemize
6344
6345 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6346 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6347 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6348 section @samp{.data}:
6349 @smallexample
6350 SECTIONS
6351 @{
6352 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6353 @}
6354 @end smallexample
6355 @noindent
6356 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6357 @samp{.data} section.
6358
6359 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6360 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6361
6362 @node Builtin Functions
6363 @subsection Builtin Functions
6364 @cindex functions in expressions
6365 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6366 use in linker script expressions.
6367
6368 @table @code
6369 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6370 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6371 @cindex expression, absolute
6372 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6373 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6374 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6375 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6376
6377 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6378 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6379 @cindex section address in expression
6380 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6381 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6382 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6383 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6384 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6385 the other two will be absolute:
6386 @smallexample
6387 @group
6388 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6389 .output1 :
6390 @{
6391 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6392 @dots{}
6393 @}
6394 .output :
6395 @{
6396 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6397 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6398 @}
6399 @dots{} @}
6400 @end group
6401 @end smallexample
6402
6403 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6404 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6405 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6406 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6407 @cindex round up location counter
6408 @cindex align location counter
6409 @cindex round up expression
6410 @cindex align expression
6411 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6412 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6413 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6414 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6415 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6416 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6417
6418 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6419 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6420 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6421 input sections:
6422 @smallexample
6423 @group
6424 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6425 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6426 *(.data)
6427 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6428 @}
6429 @dots{} @}
6430 @end group
6431 @end smallexample
6432 @noindent
6433 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6434 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6435 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6436 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6437
6438 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6439
6440 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6441 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6442 @cindex section alignment
6443 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6444 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6445 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6446 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6447 value in that section.
6448 @smallexample
6449 @group
6450 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6451 .output @{
6452 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6453 @dots{}
6454 @}
6455 @dots{} @}
6456 @end group
6457 @end smallexample
6458
6459 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6460 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6461 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6462 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6463 section.
6464
6465 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6466 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6467 This is equivalent to either
6468 @smallexample
6469 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6470 @end smallexample
6471 or
6472 @smallexample
6473 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6474 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6475 @end smallexample
6476 @noindent
6477 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6478 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6479 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6480 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6481 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6482 bytes in the on-disk file.
6483
6484 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6485 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6486 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6487 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6488 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6489 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6490 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6491
6492 @noindent
6493 Example:
6494 @smallexample
6495 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6496 @end smallexample
6497
6498 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6499 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6500 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6501 evaluation purposes.
6502
6503 @smallexample
6504 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6505 @end smallexample
6506
6507 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6508 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6509 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6510 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6511 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6512 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6513 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6514 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6515 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6516 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6517 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6518 section alignment.
6519
6520 @smallexample
6521 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6522 @end smallexample
6523
6524 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6525 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6526 @cindex symbol defaults
6527 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6528 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6529 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6530 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6531 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6532 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6533 existed, its value is preserved:
6534
6535 @smallexample
6536 @group
6537 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6538 .text : @{
6539 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6540 @dots{}
6541 @}
6542 @dots{}
6543 @}
6544 @end group
6545 @end smallexample
6546
6547 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6548 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6549 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6550
6551 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6552 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6553 @cindex section load address in expression
6554 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6555 Section LMA}).
6556
6557 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6558 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6559 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6560 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6561
6562 @kindex MAX
6563 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6564 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6565
6566 @kindex MIN
6567 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6568 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6569
6570 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6571 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6572 @cindex unallocated address, next
6573 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6574 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6575 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6576 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6577
6578 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6579 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6580 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6581
6582 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6583 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6584 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6585 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6586 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6587 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6588 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6589 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6590 name.
6591
6592 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6593 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6594 @cindex section size
6595 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6596 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6597 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6598 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6599 @smallexample
6600 @group
6601 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6602 .output @{
6603 .start = . ;
6604 @dots{}
6605 .end = . ;
6606 @}
6607 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6608 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6609 @dots{} @}
6610 @end group
6611 @end smallexample
6612
6613 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6614 @itemx sizeof_headers
6615 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6616 @cindex header size
6617 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6618 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6619 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6620 choose, to facilitate paging.
6621
6622 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6623 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6624 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6625 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6626 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6627 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6628 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6629 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6630 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6631 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6632 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6633 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6634 @end table
6635
6636 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6637 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6638 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6639 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6640 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6641 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6642 linker will report an error.
6643
6644 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6645
6646 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6647 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6648 commands.
6649
6650 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6651 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6652 read. This can affect archive searching.
6653
6654 @ifset GENERIC
6655 @node Machine Dependent
6656 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6657
6658 @cindex machine dependencies
6659 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6660 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6661 functionality are not listed.
6662
6663 @menu
6664 @ifset H8300
6665 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6666 @end ifset
6667 @ifset M68HC11
6668 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6669 @end ifset
6670 @ifset ARM
6671 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6672 @end ifset
6673 @ifset HPPA
6674 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6675 @end ifset
6676 @ifset M68K
6677 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6678 @end ifset
6679 @ifset MIPS
6680 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6681 @end ifset
6682 @ifset MMIX
6683 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6684 @end ifset
6685 @ifset MSP430
6686 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6687 @end ifset
6688 @ifset NDS32
6689 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6690 @end ifset
6691 @ifset NIOSII
6692 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6693 @end ifset
6694 @ifset POWERPC
6695 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6696 @end ifset
6697 @ifset POWERPC64
6698 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6699 @end ifset
6700 @ifset S/390
6701 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6702 @end ifset
6703 @ifset SPU
6704 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6705 @end ifset
6706 @ifset TICOFF
6707 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6708 @end ifset
6709 @ifset WIN32
6710 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6711 @end ifset
6712 @ifset XTENSA
6713 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6714 @end ifset
6715 @end menu
6716 @end ifset
6717
6718 @ifset H8300
6719 @ifclear GENERIC
6720 @raisesections
6721 @end ifclear
6722
6723 @node H8/300
6724 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6725
6726 @cindex H8/300 support
6727 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6728 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6729
6730 @table @emph
6731 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6732 @item relaxing address modes
6733 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6734 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6735 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6736 respectively.
6737
6738 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6739 @item synthesizing instructions
6740 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6741 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6742 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6743 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6744 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6745 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6746 top page of memory).
6747
6748 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6749 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6750 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6751 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6752 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6753 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6754 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6755
6756 @item bit manipulation instructions
6757 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6758 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6759 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6760 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6761 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6762 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6763 the top page of memory).
6764
6765 @item system control instructions
6766 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6767 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6768 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6769 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6770 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6771 the top page of memory).
6772 @end table
6773
6774 @ifclear GENERIC
6775 @lowersections
6776 @end ifclear
6777 @end ifset
6778
6779 @ifclear GENERIC
6780 @ifset Renesas
6781 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6782 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6783 @node Renesas
6784 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6785
6786 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6787 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6788 options are required for these chips.
6789 @end ifset
6790 @end ifclear
6791
6792 @ifset ARM
6793 @ifclear GENERIC
6794 @raisesections
6795 @end ifclear
6796
6797 @ifset M68HC11
6798 @ifclear GENERIC
6799 @raisesections
6800 @end ifclear
6801
6802 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6803 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6804
6805 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6806
6807 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6808
6809 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6810 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6811
6812 @table @emph
6813 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6814 @item relaxing address modes
6815 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6816 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6817 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6818 respectively.
6819
6820 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6821 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6822 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6823
6824 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6825 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6826 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6827 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6828 @code{bset} instructions.
6829
6830 @end table
6831
6832 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6833
6834 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6835 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6836 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6837 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6838 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6839 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6840 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6841 point to the function trampoline.
6842
6843 @ifclear GENERIC
6844 @lowersections
6845 @end ifclear
6846 @end ifset
6847
6848 @node ARM
6849 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6850
6851 @cindex ARM interworking support
6852 @kindex --support-old-code
6853 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6854 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6855 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6856 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6857 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6858 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6859 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6860 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6861 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6862 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6863
6864 @cindex thumb entry point
6865 @cindex entry point, thumb
6866 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6867 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6868 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6869 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6870 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6871 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6872
6873 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6874 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6875 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6876 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6877 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6878 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6879
6880 @cindex BE8
6881 @kindex --be8
6882 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6883 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6884 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6885 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6886 little-endian code.
6887
6888 @cindex TARGET1
6889 @kindex --target1-rel
6890 @kindex --target1-abs
6891 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6892 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6893 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6894 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6895
6896 @cindex TARGET2
6897 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6898 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6899 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6900 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6901 @table @samp
6902 @item rel
6903 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6904 @item abs
6905 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6906 @item got-rel
6907 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6908 @end table
6909
6910 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6911 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6912 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6913 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6914 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6915 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6916
6917 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6918 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6919 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6920
6921 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6922 relocations are ignored.
6923
6924 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6925 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6926 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6927 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6928
6929 @smallexample
6930 TST rM, #1
6931 MOVEQ PC, rM
6932 BX Rn
6933 @end smallexample
6934
6935 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6936 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6937 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6938
6939 @cindex USE_BLX
6940 @kindex --use-blx
6941 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6942 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6943 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6944 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6945 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6946
6947 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6948 specify it if you are using that target.
6949
6950 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6951 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6952 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6953 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6954 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6955 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6956 the support code can read the intended values.
6957
6958 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6959 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6960 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6961 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6962 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6963 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6964
6965 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6966 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6967 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6968 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6969 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6970 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6971
6972 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6973 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6974 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6975 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6976 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6977 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6978 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6979
6980 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6981 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6982 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6983 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6984 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6985 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6986 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6987
6988 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6989 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6990 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6991
6992 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6993 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6994
6995 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6996 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6997 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6998 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6999 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7000 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7001 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7002 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7003
7004 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7005 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7006
7007 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7008 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7009 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7010 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7011 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7012
7013 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7014 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7015 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7016 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7017 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7018 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7019
7020 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7021 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7022
7023 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7024 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7025 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7026 occurs.
7027
7028 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7029 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7030 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7031 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7032 occurs.
7033
7034 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7035 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7036 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7037 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7038 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7039 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7040 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7041 not be diagnosed.
7042
7043 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7044 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7045 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7046 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7047 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7048 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7049 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7050
7051 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7052 @kindex --pic-veneer
7053 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7054 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7055 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7056 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7057
7058 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7059 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7060 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7061 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7062 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7063 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7064 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7065 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7066 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7067 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7068 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7069 where they should be placed.
7070
7071 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7072 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7073 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7074 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7075 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7076 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7077 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7078 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7079 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7080 from the input sections.
7081
7082 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7083 @samp{N = +1}.
7084
7085 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7086 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7087 otherwise.
7088
7089 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7090 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7091 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7092 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7093
7094 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7095
7096 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7097 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7098 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7099 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7100
7101 Please contact ARM for further details.
7102
7103 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7104 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7105 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7106 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7107
7108 @kindex --long-plt
7109 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7110 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7111 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7112 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7113
7114 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7115 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7116 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7117 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7118
7119 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7120 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7121 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7122 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7123 veneers in memory.
7124
7125 @kindex --cmse-implib
7126 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7127 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7128 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7129 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7130 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7131
7132 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7133 @cindex Input import library
7134 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7135 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7136 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7137 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7138 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7139 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7140 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7141 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7142 specified.
7143
7144 @ifclear GENERIC
7145 @lowersections
7146 @end ifclear
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset HPPA
7150 @ifclear GENERIC
7151 @raisesections
7152 @end ifclear
7153
7154 @node HPPA ELF32
7155 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7156 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7157 @kindex --multi-subspace
7158 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7159 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7160 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7161 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7162 multiple sub-spaces.
7163
7164 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7165 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7166 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7167 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7168 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7169 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7170 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7171 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7172 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7173 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7174 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7175 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7176 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7177 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7178 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7179 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7180
7181 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7182 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7183 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7184 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7185
7186 @ifclear GENERIC
7187 @lowersections
7188 @end ifclear
7189 @end ifset
7190
7191 @ifset M68K
7192 @ifclear GENERIC
7193 @raisesections
7194 @end ifclear
7195
7196 @node M68K
7197 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7198
7199 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7200 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7201 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7202 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7203 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7204 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7205 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7206 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7207 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7208 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7209 support such GOTs.
7210 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7211 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7212 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7213 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7214
7215 @ifclear GENERIC
7216 @lowersections
7217 @end ifclear
7218 @end ifset
7219
7220 @ifset MIPS
7221 @ifclear GENERIC
7222 @raisesections
7223 @end ifclear
7224
7225 @node MIPS
7226 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7227
7228 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7229 @kindex --insn32
7230 @kindex --no-insn32
7231 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7232 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7233 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7234 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7235 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7236 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7237
7238 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7239 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7240 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7241 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7242 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7243 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7244 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7245 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7246 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7247 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7248 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7249 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7250
7251 @ifclear GENERIC
7252 @lowersections
7253 @end ifclear
7254 @end ifset
7255
7256 @ifset MMIX
7257 @ifclear GENERIC
7258 @raisesections
7259 @end ifclear
7260
7261 @node MMIX
7262 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7263 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7264 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7265 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7266 can translate between the two formats.
7267
7268 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7269 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7270 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7271 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7272 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7273 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7274 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7275 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7276
7277 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7278 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7279 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7280 of a section.
7281
7282 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7283 are left out from an mmo file.
7284
7285 @ifclear GENERIC
7286 @lowersections
7287 @end ifclear
7288 @end ifset
7289
7290 @ifset MSP430
7291 @ifclear GENERIC
7292 @raisesections
7293 @end ifclear
7294
7295 @node MSP430
7296 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7297 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7298 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7299 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7300
7301 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7302 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7303
7304 @table @code
7305 @item @samp{.vectors}
7306 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7307
7308 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7309 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7310 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7311
7312 @item @samp{.infomem}
7313 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7314 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7315
7316 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7317 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7318 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7319
7320 @item @samp{.noinit}
7321 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7322
7323 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7324 @end table
7325
7326 @table @option
7327 @cindex MSP430 Options
7328 @kindex --code-region
7329 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7330 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7331 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7332 using this option.
7333
7334 @kindex --data-region
7335 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7336 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7337 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7338 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7339
7340 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7341 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7342 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7343 and @code{--data-region} options.
7344 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7345 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7346 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7347 @end table
7348
7349 @ifclear GENERIC
7350 @lowersections
7351 @end ifclear
7352 @end ifset
7353
7354 @ifset NDS32
7355 @ifclear GENERIC
7356 @raisesections
7357 @end ifclear
7358
7359 @node NDS32
7360 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7361 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7362 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7363 relaxes objects according to these options.
7364
7365 @table @code
7366 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7367 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7368
7369 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7370 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7371
7372 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7373 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7374
7375 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7376 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7377
7378 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7379 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7380
7381 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7382 Update the existing EX9 table.
7383
7384 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7385 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7386
7387 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7388 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7389
7390 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7391 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7392
7393 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7394 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7395 @end table
7396
7397 @ifclear GENERIC
7398 @lowersections
7399 @end ifclear
7400 @end ifset
7401
7402 @ifset NIOSII
7403 @ifclear GENERIC
7404 @raisesections
7405 @end ifclear
7406
7407 @node Nios II
7408 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7409 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7410 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7411
7412 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7413 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7414 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7415 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7416 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7417 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7418 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7419 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7420 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7421 larger than 256MB.
7422
7423 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7424 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7425 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7426 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7427 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7428 register as a temporary.
7429
7430 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7431 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7432 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7433
7434 @ifclear GENERIC
7435 @lowersections
7436 @end ifclear
7437 @end ifset
7438
7439 @ifset POWERPC
7440 @ifclear GENERIC
7441 @raisesections
7442 @end ifclear
7443
7444 @node PowerPC ELF32
7445 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7446 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7447 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7448 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7449 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7450 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7451 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7452 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7453 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7454 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7455 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7456 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7457 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7458
7459 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7460 @table @option
7461 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7462 @kindex --bss-plt
7463 @item --bss-plt
7464 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7465 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7466 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7467 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7468 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7469 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7470 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7471 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7472
7473 @kindex --secure-plt
7474 @item --secure-plt
7475 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7476 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7477 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7478 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7479 style BSS PLT.
7480
7481 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7482 @kindex --sdata-got
7483 @item --sdata-got
7484 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7485 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7486 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7487 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7488 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7489 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7490 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7491 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7492 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7493 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7494 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7495 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7496
7497 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7498 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7499 @item --emit-stub-syms
7500 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7501 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7502
7503 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7504 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7505 @item --no-tls-optimize
7506 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7507 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7508 disable the optimization.
7509 @end table
7510
7511 @ifclear GENERIC
7512 @lowersections
7513 @end ifclear
7514 @end ifset
7515
7516 @ifset POWERPC64
7517 @ifclear GENERIC
7518 @raisesections
7519 @end ifclear
7520
7521 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7522 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7523
7524 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7525 @table @option
7526 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7527 @kindex --stub-group-size
7528 @item --stub-group-size
7529 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7530 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7531 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7532 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7533 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7534 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7535 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7536 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7537 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7538 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7539 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7540 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7541 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7542 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7543
7544 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7545 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7546 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7547 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7548
7549 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7550 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7551 @item --emit-stub-syms
7552 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7553 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7554
7555 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7556 @kindex --dotsyms
7557 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7558 @item --dotsyms
7559 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7560 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7561 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7562 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7563 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7564 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7565 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7566 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7567 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7568 feature.
7569
7570 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7571 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7572 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7573 @item --save-restore-funcs
7574 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7575 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7576 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7577 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7578 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7579 link.
7580
7581 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7582 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7583 @item --no-tls-optimize
7584 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7585 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7586 disable the optimization.
7587
7588 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7589 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7590 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7591 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7592 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7593 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7594 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7595 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7596 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7597 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7598 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7599 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7600 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7601 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7602 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7603
7604 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7605 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7606 @item --no-opd-optimize
7607 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7608 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7609 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7610 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7611
7612 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7613 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7614 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7615 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7616 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7617 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7618 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7619
7620 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7621 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7622 @item --no-toc-optimize
7623 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7624 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7625 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7626 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7627 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7628 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7629 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7630 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7631 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7632 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7633 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7634 optimization.
7635
7636 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7637 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7638 @item --no-multi-toc
7639 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7640 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7641 where TOC
7642 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7643 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7644 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7645 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7646 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7647 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7648 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7649 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7650
7651 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7652 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7653 @item --no-toc-sort
7654 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7655 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7656 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7657 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7658 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7659 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7660 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7661 off this feature.
7662
7663 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7664 @kindex --plt-align
7665 @kindex --no-plt-align
7666 @item --plt-align
7667 @itemx --no-plt-align
7668 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7669 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7670 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7671 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7672 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7673 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7674 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7675
7676 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7677 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7678 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7679 @item --plt-static-chain
7680 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7681 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7682 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7683 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7684
7685 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7686 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7687 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7688 @item --plt-thread-safe
7689 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7690 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7691 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7692 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7693 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7694 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7695 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7696 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7697 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7698 default behaviour.
7699
7700 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7701 @kindex --plt-localentry
7702 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7703 @item --plt-localentry
7704 @itemx --no-localentry
7705 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7706 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7707 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7708 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7709 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7710 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7711 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7712 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7713 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7714 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7715 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7716 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7717 @end table
7718
7719 @ifclear GENERIC
7720 @lowersections
7721 @end ifclear
7722 @end ifset
7723
7724 @ifset S/390
7725 @ifclear GENERIC
7726 @raisesections
7727 @end ifclear
7728
7729 @node S/390 ELF
7730 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7731
7732 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7733 @table @option
7734
7735 @cindex S/390
7736 @kindex --s390-pgste
7737 @item --s390-pgste
7738 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7739 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7740 binaries marked that way.
7741 @end table
7742
7743 @ifclear GENERIC
7744 @lowersections
7745 @end ifclear
7746 @end ifset
7747
7748 @ifset SPU
7749 @ifclear GENERIC
7750 @raisesections
7751 @end ifclear
7752
7753 @node SPU ELF
7754 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7755
7756 @cindex SPU ELF options
7757 @table @option
7758
7759 @cindex SPU plugins
7760 @kindex --plugin
7761 @item --plugin
7762 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7763
7764 @cindex SPU overlays
7765 @kindex --no-overlays
7766 @item --no-overlays
7767 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7768 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7769 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7770 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7771
7772 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7773 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7774 @item --emit-stub-syms
7775 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7776 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7777
7778 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7779 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7780 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7781 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7782 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7783 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7784
7785 @cindex SPU local store size
7786 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7787 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7788 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7789 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7790 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7791
7792 @cindex SPU
7793 @kindex --stack-analysis
7794 @item --stack-analysis
7795 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7796 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7797 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7798 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7799 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7800 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7801 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7802 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7803 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7804 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7805 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7806 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7807 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7808 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7809 and calls will be given.
7810
7811 @cindex SPU
7812 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7813 @item --emit-stack-syms
7814 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7815 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7816 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7817 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7818 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7819 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7820 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7821 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7822 @end table
7823
7824 @ifclear GENERIC
7825 @lowersections
7826 @end ifclear
7827 @end ifset
7828
7829 @ifset TICOFF
7830 @ifclear GENERIC
7831 @raisesections
7832 @end ifclear
7833
7834 @node TI COFF
7835 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7836 @cindex TI COFF versions
7837 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7838 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7839 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7840 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7841 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7842 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7843
7844 @ifclear GENERIC
7845 @lowersections
7846 @end ifclear
7847 @end ifset
7848
7849 @ifset WIN32
7850 @ifclear GENERIC
7851 @raisesections
7852 @end ifclear
7853
7854 @node WIN32
7855 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7856
7857 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7858 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7859 command-line options mentioned here.
7860
7861 @table @emph
7862 @cindex import libraries
7863 @item import libraries
7864 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7865 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7866 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7867 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7868 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7869 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7870
7871 @item exporting DLL symbols
7872 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7873 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7874
7875 @table @emph
7876 @item using auto-export functionality
7877 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7878 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7879 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7880
7881 @itemize
7882 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7883 @item --exclude-symbols
7884 @item --exclude-libs
7885 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7886 @item --version-script
7887 @end itemize
7888
7889 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7890 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7891 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7892 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7893 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7894 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7895 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7896 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7897
7898 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7899 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7900 if either of the following are true:
7901
7902 @itemize
7903 @item A DEF file is used.
7904 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7905 @end itemize
7906
7907 @item using a DEF file
7908 @cindex using a DEF file
7909 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7910 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7911 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7912 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7913 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7914
7915 @example
7916 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7917 @end example
7918
7919 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7920 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7921
7922 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7923
7924 @example
7925 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7926
7927 EXPORTS
7928 foo
7929 bar
7930 _bar = bar
7931 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7932 var1 DATA
7933 doo = foo == foo2
7934 eoo DATA == var1
7935 @end example
7936
7937 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7938 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7939 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7940 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7941 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7942 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7943 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7944 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7945 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7946
7947 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7948 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7949 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7950
7951 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7952 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7953 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7954 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7955
7956 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7957 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7958 non-default base address for the image.
7959
7960 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7961 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7962 filename specified on the command line.
7963
7964 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7965
7966 @example
7967 EXPORTS
7968 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7969 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7970 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7971 @end example
7972
7973 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7974 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7975 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7976 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7977 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7978 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7979 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7980
7981 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7982
7983 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7984 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7985 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7986 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7987 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7988
7989 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7990 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7991 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7992 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7993
7994 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7995 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7996 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7997 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7998 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7999 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8000 application will behave unexpectedly.
8001
8002 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8003 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8004 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8005 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8006 the DLL without an import library.
8007
8008 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8009 other DEF file statements
8010
8011 @cindex creating a DEF file
8012 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8013 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8014
8015 @item Using decorations
8016 @cindex Using decorations
8017 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8018 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8019 declared as:
8020
8021 @example
8022 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8023 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8024 @end example
8025
8026 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8027 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8028 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8029 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8030
8031 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8032 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8033 instead:
8034
8035 @example
8036 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8037 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8038 @end example
8039
8040 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8041 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8042 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8043 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8044 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8045 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8046 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8047 information.
8048 @end table
8049
8050 @cindex automatic data imports
8051 @item automatic data imports
8052 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8053 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8054 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8055 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8056 code to these platforms, especially for large
8057 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8058 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8059 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8060 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8061 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8062 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8063 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8064 trigger the feature's use.
8065
8066 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8067 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8068
8069 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8070 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8071
8072 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8073 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8074 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8075 below.
8076
8077 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8078 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8079 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8080 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8081 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8082 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8083 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8084 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8085 references.
8086
8087 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8088 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8089 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8090 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8091 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8092 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8093 run without error on an older system.
8094
8095 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8096 enabled as needed.
8097
8098 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8099 @item direct linking to a dll
8100 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8101 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8102 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8103 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8104 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8105 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8106 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8107 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8108 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8109 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8110
8111 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8112 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8113 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8114 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8115 select the dll instead of an import library.
8116
8117
8118 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8119 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8120
8121 @example
8122 libxxx.dll.a
8123 xxx.dll.a
8124 libxxx.a
8125 xxx.lib
8126 libxxx.lib
8127 cygxxx.dll (*)
8128 libxxx.dll
8129 xxx.dll
8130 @end example
8131
8132 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8133
8134 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8135 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8136 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8137 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8138 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8139
8140 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8141 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8142 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8143 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8144 could coexist on the same machine.
8145
8146 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8147 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8148 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8149
8150 @example
8151 bin/
8152 cygxxx.dll
8153 lib/
8154 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8155 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8156 @end example
8157
8158 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8159 done two ways:
8160
8161 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8162 @example
8163 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8164 @end example
8165
8166 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8167 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8168 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8169 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8170
8171 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8172 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8173 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8174 making the app/dll.
8175
8176 @example
8177 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8178 @end example
8179
8180 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8181
8182 @example
8183 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8184 @end example
8185
8186 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8187 perfectly legal
8188
8189 @example
8190 bin/
8191 cygxxx-5.dll
8192 lib/
8193 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8194 @end example
8195
8196 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8197 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8198 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8199
8200 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8201 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8202
8203 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8204 work with auto-imported data.
8205
8206 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8207 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8208 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8209 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8210 possible to do this without an import lib.
8211
8212 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8213 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8214 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8215 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8216
8217 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8218 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8219 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8220 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8221 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8222 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8223 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8224
8225 @item symbol aliasing
8226 @table @emph
8227 @item adding additional names
8228 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8229 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8230 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8231 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8232 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8233
8234 @example
8235 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8236
8237 EXPORTS
8238 foo
8239 _foo = foo
8240 @end example
8241
8242 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8243
8244 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8245 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8246
8247 @example
8248 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8249 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8250 @end example
8251
8252 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8253 symbols.
8254
8255 @item renaming symbols
8256 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8257 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8258 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8259 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8260 created). In the following example:
8261
8262 @example
8263 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8264
8265 EXPORTS
8266 _foo = foo
8267 @end example
8268
8269 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8270 @samp{_foo}.
8271 @end table
8272
8273 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8274 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8275 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8276 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8277 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8278 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8279 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8280 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8281 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8282 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8283 which is probably not what you wanted.
8284
8285 @cindex weak externals
8286 @item weak externals
8287 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8288 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8289 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8290 are three variants of weak externals:
8291 @itemize
8292 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8293 called lazy externals.
8294 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8295 This form is not presently implemented.
8296 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8297 implemented.
8298 @end itemize
8299 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8300 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8301 uses a default value.
8302
8303 @cindex aligned common symbols
8304 @item aligned common symbols
8305 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8306 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8307 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8308 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8309 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8310 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8311 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8312 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8313
8314 @end table
8315
8316 @ifclear GENERIC
8317 @lowersections
8318 @end ifclear
8319 @end ifset
8320
8321 @ifset XTENSA
8322 @ifclear GENERIC
8323 @raisesections
8324 @end ifclear
8325
8326 @node Xtensa
8327 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8328
8329 @cindex Xtensa processors
8330 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8331 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8332 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8333 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8334 example, with the command:
8335
8336 @smallexample
8337 SECTIONS
8338 @{
8339 .text : @{
8340 *(.literal .text)
8341 @}
8342 @}
8343 @end smallexample
8344
8345 @noindent
8346 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8347 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8348 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8349 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8350 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8351 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8352 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8353
8354 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8355 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8356 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8357 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8358 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8359 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8360 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8361 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8362 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8363 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8364 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8365 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8366
8367 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8368 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8369 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8370 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8371 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8372 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8373 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8374 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8375 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8376 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8377 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8378 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8379 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8380 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8381
8382 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8383 control the linker:
8384
8385 @cindex Xtensa options
8386 @table @option
8387 @item --size-opt
8388 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8389 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8390 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8391 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8392 preserve the correctness of the code.
8393 @end table
8394
8395 @ifclear GENERIC
8396 @lowersections
8397 @end ifclear
8398 @end ifset
8399
8400 @ifclear SingleFormat
8401 @node BFD
8402 @chapter BFD
8403
8404 @cindex back end
8405 @cindex object file management
8406 @cindex object formats available
8407 @kindex objdump -i
8408 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8409 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8410 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8411 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8412 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8413 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8414 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8415 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8416 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8417
8418 @cindex BFD requirements
8419 @cindex requirements for BFD
8420 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8421 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8422 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8423 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8424 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8425 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8426 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8427
8428 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8429 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8430 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8431 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8432
8433 @menu
8434 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8435 @end menu
8436
8437 @node BFD outline
8438 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8439 @cindex opening object files
8440 @include bfdsumm.texi
8441 @end ifclear
8442
8443 @node Reporting Bugs
8444 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8445 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8446 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8447
8448 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8449
8450 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8451 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8452 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8453 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8454 @command{ld}.
8455
8456 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8457 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8458
8459 @menu
8460 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8461 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8462 @end menu
8463
8464 @node Bug Criteria
8465 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8466 @cindex bug criteria
8467
8468 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8469
8470 @itemize @bullet
8471 @cindex fatal signal
8472 @cindex linker crash
8473 @cindex crash of linker
8474 @item
8475 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8476 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8477
8478 @cindex error on valid input
8479 @item
8480 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8481
8482 @cindex invalid input
8483 @item
8484 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8485 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8486 object files are correct.
8487
8488 @item
8489 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8490 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8491 @end itemize
8492
8493 @node Bug Reporting
8494 @section How to Report Bugs
8495 @cindex bug reports
8496 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8497
8498 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8499 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8500 recommend you contact that organization first.
8501
8502 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8503 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8504 distribution.
8505
8506 @ifset BUGURL
8507 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8508 @value{BUGURL}.
8509 @end ifset
8510
8511 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8512 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8513 fact or leave it out, state it!
8514
8515 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8516 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8517 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8518 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8519 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8520 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8521 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8522 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8523 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8524 and the most helpful.
8525
8526 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8527 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8528 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8529
8530 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8531 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8532 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8533 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8534
8535 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8536
8537 @itemize @bullet
8538 @item
8539 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8540 the @samp{--version} argument.
8541
8542 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8543 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8544
8545 @item
8546 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8547 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8548
8549 @item
8550 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8551 version number.
8552
8553 @item
8554 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8555 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8556
8557 @item
8558 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8559 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8560 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8561 sufficient.
8562
8563 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8564 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8565
8566 @item
8567 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8568 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8569 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8570 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8571 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8572 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8573 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8574 attachments are best.
8575
8576 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8577 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8578 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8579 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8580 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8581
8582 @item
8583 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8584 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8585
8586 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8587 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8588 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8589 a chance to make a mistake.
8590
8591 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8592 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8593 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8594 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8595 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8596 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8597 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8598 any conclusion from our observations.
8599
8600 @item
8601 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8602 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8603 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8604 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8605 context, not by line number.
8606
8607 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8608 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8609 @end itemize
8610
8611 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8612
8613 @itemize @bullet
8614 @item
8615 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8616
8617 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8618 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8619 changes will not affect it.
8620
8621 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8622 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8623 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8624 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8625
8626 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8627 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8628 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8629 less time, and so on.
8630
8631 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8632 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8633
8634 @item
8635 A patch for the bug.
8636
8637 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8638 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8639 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8640 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8641
8642 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8643 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8644 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8645 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8646 fixed.
8647
8648 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8649 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8650 help us to understand.
8651
8652 @item
8653 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8654
8655 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8656 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8657 @end itemize
8658
8659 @node MRI
8660 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8661 @cindex MRI compatibility
8662 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8663 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8664 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8665 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8666 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8667 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8668 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8669
8670 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8671 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8672 features to make use of them.
8673
8674 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8675 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8676
8677 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8678 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8679 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8680 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8681 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8682
8683 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8684
8685 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8686 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8687 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8688
8689 @table @code
8690 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8691 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8692 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8693 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8694 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8695 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8696 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8697 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8698 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8699 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8700 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8701
8702 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8703 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8704 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8705 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8706
8707 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8708
8709 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8710 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8711 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8712 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8713
8714 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8715 @item BASE @var{expression}
8716 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8717 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8718
8719 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8720 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8721 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8722 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8723
8724 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8725 @item END
8726 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8727
8728 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8729 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8730 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8731 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8732
8733 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8734 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8735 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8736 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8737
8738 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8739 same line, with no change in its effect.
8740
8741 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8742 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8743 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8744 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8745 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8746 command line.
8747
8748 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8749 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8750 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8751 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8752 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8753
8754 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8755 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8756 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8757 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8758 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8759 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8760 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8761 file, in the order specified.
8762
8763 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8764 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8765 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8766 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8767 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8768 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8769
8770 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8771 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8772 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8773 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8774 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8775 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8776 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8777 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8778 @end table
8779
8780 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8781 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8782 @include fdl.texi
8783
8784 @node LD Index
8785 @unnumbered LD Index
8786
8787 @printindex cp
8788
8789 @tex
8790 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8791 % meantime:
8792 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8793 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8794 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8795 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8796 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8797 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8798 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8799 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8800 \page\colophon
8801 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8802 @end tex
8803
8804 @bye
This page took 0.274824 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.